2018 Ford Expedition Owners Manual Version 1 Om 2 EN US 08 2017

User Manual: 2018 Ford Expedition Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 553

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com

ford.ca

August 2017
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Expedition
Litho in U.S.A.

JL1J 19A321 AA

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2017
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201708 20170808123402

Table of Contents
Introduction

Supplementary Restraints
System

About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.......................................12
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13

Principle of Operation..................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45
Front Passenger Sensing System............46
Side Airbags.....................................................48
Safety Canopy™............................................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50
Airbag Disposal................................................51

Keys and Remote Controls

Protecting the Environment........................15

General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................52
Remote Control...............................................52
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................59

At a Glance

MyKey™

Instrument Panel Overview........................16

Principle of Operation..................................60
Creating a MyKey............................................61
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62
Checking MyKey System Status...............63
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................64
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................64

Environment

Child Safety
General Information.......................................18
Installing Child Restraints............................19
Booster Seats..................................................29
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety Locks..........................................33

Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................65
Keyless Entry...................................................68

Seatbelts
Principle of Operation..................................35
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................40
Seatbelt Reminder........................................40
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................42
Seatbelt Extension........................................42

Liftgate
Manual Liftgate................................................71
Power Liftgate..................................................72

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78

Personal Safety System™

Power Running Boards

Personal Safety System™..........................43

Using Power Running Boards....................79

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Table of Contents
Liftgate Window.............................................99

Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................81
Audio Control...................................................82
Voice Control...................................................83
Cruise Control..................................................83
Information Display Control.......................83
Heated Steering Wheel...............................83

Instrument Cluster
Gauges..............................................................101
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............104
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........108

Information Displays

Adjusting the Pedals....................................84

General Information....................................109
Information Messages.................................119

Wipers and Washers

Climate Control

Windshield Wipers........................................85
Autowipers.......................................................85
Windshield Washers.....................................86
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........86

Manual Climate Control.............................135
Automatic Climate Control......................136
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................138
Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........141
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................142
Cabin Air Filter................................................143
Remote Start..................................................143

Pedals

Lighting
General Information......................................87
Lighting Control..............................................87
Autolamps........................................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................88
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................89
Daytime Running Lamps............................89
Automatic High Beam Control.................89
Front Fog Lamps............................................90
Direction Indicators........................................91
Interior Lamps..................................................91
Ambient Lighting............................................92

Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................144
Head Restraints............................................144
Manual Seats.................................................147
Power Seats...................................................148
Memory Function.........................................150
Rear Seats.......................................................152
Heated Seats..................................................157
Climate Controlled Seats..........................158

Windows and Mirrors

Universal Garage Door
Opener

Power Windows..............................................93
Global Opening and Closing......................94
Exterior Mirrors................................................95
Interior Mirror....................................................97
Childminder Mirror........................................98
Sun Visors.........................................................98
Moonroof - Vehicles With: Vista Roof
Opening Panel............................................98

Universal Garage Door Opener...............160

Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................164
Wireless Charging........................................165

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Table of Contents

Center Console..............................................167
Overhead Console........................................167

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................202
Electric Parking Brake................................203
Hill Start Assist.............................................205

Starting and Stopping the
Engine

Traction Control

Storage Compartments

Principle of Operation................................207
Using Traction Control...............................207

General Information....................................168
Ignition Switch...............................................168
Keyless Starting............................................168
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................169
Engine Block Heater.....................................172

Stability Control
Principle of Operation...............................208
Using Stability Control..............................209

Unique Driving Characteristics

Hill Descent Control

Auto-Start-Stop............................................174

Principle of Operation..................................211
Using Hill Descent Control.........................211

Fuel and Refueling

Parking Aids

Safety Precautions.......................................176
Fuel Quality.....................................................176
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................177
Running Out of Fuel.....................................177
Refueling..........................................................178
Fuel Consumption........................................181

Engine Emission Control

Principle of Operation.................................212
Rear Parking Aid............................................212
Front Parking Aid...........................................213
Side Sensing System...................................214
Active Park Assist.........................................216
Rear View Camera.......................................222
360 Degree Camera...................................225

Emission Law.................................................183
Catalytic Converter......................................184

Cruise Control

Automatic Transmission............................187

Principle of Operation.................................227
Using Cruise Control...................................227
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................228

Four-Wheel Drive

Driving Aids

Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................194

Driver Alert......................................................235
Lane Keeping System................................236
Blind Spot Information System.............240
Cross Traffic Alert........................................244
Steering...........................................................246
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................247
Drive Control...................................................251

Transmission

Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential.............................201

Brakes
General Information...................................202

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)............................................................302
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................302

Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................254
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................256
Load Limit......................................................258

Fuses

Towing

Fuse Box Locations....................................304
Fuse Specification Chart..........................304
Changing a Fuse............................................313

Towing a Trailer............................................263
Trailer Reversing Aids.................................264
Trailer Sway Control....................................273
Recommended Towing Weights............274
Essential Towing Checks..........................276
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......283

Maintenance
General Information....................................315
Opening and Closing the Hood...............315
Under Hood Overview................................316
Engine Oil Dipstick........................................317
Engine Oil Check...........................................317
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................318
Engine Coolant Check................................319
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................323
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................323
Brake Fluid Check........................................324
Washer Fluid Check....................................324
Fuel Filter........................................................325
Changing the 12V Battery.........................325
Checking the Wiper Blades......................327
Changing the Wiper Blades......................327
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................328
Removing a Headlamp..............................329
Changing a Bulb...........................................329
Bulb Specification Chart............................331
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................333

Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................287
Reduced Engine Performance................287
Economical Driving.....................................287
Driving Through Water..............................288
Floor Mats......................................................288

Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance.................................290
Hazard Flashers............................................291
Fuel Shutoff....................................................291
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................292
Post-Crash Alert System..........................294
Transporting the Vehicle..........................294
Towing Points...............................................295

Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............297
In California (U.S. Only)............................298
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................299
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)......................300
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................300
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................301

Vehicle Care
General Information...................................334
Cleaning Products.......................................334
Cleaning the Exterior..................................334
Waxing.............................................................335
Cleaning the Engine....................................336

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Table of Contents
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............393
SYNC™ Applications and Services......394
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................398
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................399

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................336
Cleaning the Interior....................................337
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................337
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................338
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............338
Cleaning the Wheels..................................338
Vehicle Storage............................................339

SYNC™ 3
General Information...................................407
Home Screen................................................420
Using Voice Recognition............................421
Entertainment..............................................428
Climate............................................................438
Phone................................................................441
Navigation......................................................446
Apps.................................................................454
Settings...........................................................457
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................472

Wheels and Tires
General Information....................................341
Tire Care..........................................................343
Using Snow Chains.....................................358
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........359
Changing a Road Wheel...........................363
Technical Specifications..........................368

Capacities and Specifications

Accessories
Accessories....................................................485

Engine Specifications................................370
Motorcraft Parts...........................................370
Vehicle Identification Number................372
Vehicle Certification Label........................373
Transmission Code Designation.............373
Capacities and Specifications................374

Ford Protect
Ford Protect...................................................487

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......489
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........492
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................495
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........497

Audio System
General Information...................................379
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC...........................................................380
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Touchscreen Display................382
Digital Radio..................................................384
Satellite Radio..............................................386
USB Port.........................................................389

Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility.............508
End User License Agreement..................510
Type Approvals............................................536

SYNC™
General Information...................................390
Using Voice Recognition............................391

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E154903

Right-hand side.

Left-hand side.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.

E162384

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system

Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.

Battery

Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

Brake system

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
Cabin air filter

Front airbag
E67017

Check fuel cap

Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock

Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor

Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor

Hazard warning flashers

Cruise control

Heated rear window

Do not open when hot

Heated windshield

Engine air filter

Interior luggage compartment
release

Engine coolant

Jack

E71340

Keep out of reach of children

Engine coolant temperature
E161353

Lighting control

Engine oil

Low tire pressure warning

Explosive gas

Maintain correct fluid level

Fan warning

Fasten seatbelt

Note operating instructions

Flammable

Panic alarm

E71880

E231160

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
Parking aid

DATA RECORDING

E139213

Service Data Recording
Parking brake

Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such
as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Requires registered technician
E231159

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

See Service Manual
E231158

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Shield the eyes
E167012

Stability control
E138639

Windshield wash and wipe

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 390).

This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.

The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 390).

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.

PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.

Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 390).

For more information visit:
Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.

vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.

Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.

Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Manual that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.

Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.

Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During

NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT

WARNING

Do not connect wireless plug-in
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
13

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Introduction
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address

www.sustainability.ford.com

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

E251633

Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 91).

Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 85).

Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 109).

Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 101).

Navigation, media, phone.

Entertainment display.

Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 291).

Audio. See Audio System (page 379).

Climate control. See Climate Control (page 135).

Rear defrost.

Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 168).

Voice control. See Voice Control (page 83).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

At a Glance
M

Horn.

Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 227).

Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 81).

Parking brake release. See Brakes (page 202).

Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 87).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.

See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety

On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Recommended restraint
type

Infants or
toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
Larger children
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.

Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.

INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats

E142594

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
•

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

•

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
•

WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

•

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.

Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
restraint fit. See Head Restraints
(page 144).
Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.

Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.

Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.

Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.

When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Standard seatbelts

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle provides extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142534

10.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

E142533

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts

E142530

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E146523

E146522

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
7.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint. We recommend the use of a child
safety seat having a top tether strap. See
Using Tether Straps in this chapter.

E142534

10.

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second Row Bench Seat

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING
Do not attach two child safety
restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.

E251314

The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the vehicle seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor behind that seating
position.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.

Second Row Bucket Seats

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats

E251315

The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback, below the locator symbols on
the seatback. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.

When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.

Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.

E144054

The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.

Some of the rear seats of your vehicle have
built-in tether strap anchors behind the
seats as described below.

Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view).

Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Second Row Bench Seat

Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.

E251316

Second Row Bucket Seats

Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:

E251319

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Second Row Seating Positions

E251593

Second Row Bucket Seating Positions

E251594

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
1.

For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts. If the top of the
safety seat hits the head restraint,

recline the seat back slightly to obtain
proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

Third Row Seating Positions

E251595

Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
2. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. If
the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
crash.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly
increases.

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.

If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
29

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).

Types of Booster Seats

Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

•

E68924

Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.

E142595

•

•
•
•
•

Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?

E70710

•

High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.

Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare

the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E142596

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.

WARNINGS
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.

Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.

Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X

Restraint
Type

Combined
weight of
child and
child seat

LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)

LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)

Rear facing Up to 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)

Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
and LATCH
only
and top
(lower
tether
anchors
anchor
and top
tether
anchor)

Rear facing Over 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat

Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Forward
facing
child seat

Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
144).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

E249891

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Child Safety
The locks are on the rear edge of each rear
door and must be set separately for each
door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a
vehicle that is in the sunshine. The
hot seatbelts or seats may burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.

Children must always be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.

All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.

All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.

The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt
and rear inflatable seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

E71880

•

Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.

Seatbelt warning light and chime.

E67017

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly
35

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal
crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar

E142588

The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and properly fasten
your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142587

Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.

E142590

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.

Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

Automatic Locking Mode

Seatbelt Locking Modes

In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.

WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in a crash,
have the seatbelts and associated
components inspected as soon as
possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode when you install a child
safety seat, except a booster, in the
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in a rear seating position whenever
possible. See Child Safety (page 18).

All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seatbelts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.

How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

Non-inflatable seatbelts

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a

E142591

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Seatbelts
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.

WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts
(second row only–if equipped)

The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when you properly install them. This
is because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.

E146363

The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode

How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?

Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
side impact crashes and rollovers. The fact
that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not
inflate in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.

The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.

SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the seatbelt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the
middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the seatbelt properly could reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and
increase the risk of injury in a crash.

E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.

E146365

The fully inflated seatbelt's increased
diameter more effectively holds the
occupant in the appropriate seating
position, and spreads crash forces over
more area of the body than regular
seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on
the chest and helps control head and neck
motion for passengers.

E146191

To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME

Conditions of operation
If

Then

The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few
tion...
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...

The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
in the front passenger seat, only the front
seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.

SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the seatbelt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is
unbuckled.

If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts

If...

Then...

You and the front seat passenger buckle
your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after
you switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.

The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
You or the front seat passenger do not
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
on...
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
The seatbelt for the driver or front
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
buckle your seatbelts.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver and front passenger
seatbelts are unbuckled.

Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
turns on.

Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seatbelts
4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.

SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.

Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.

Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 334).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Personal Safety System™
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?

The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.

The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.

Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.

WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.

If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.

Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS

E151127

The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.

WARNINGS
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.

Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system. This could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.

E181984

The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator which
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled). The indicator
lamp is in the center stack of the
instrument panel.

E142846

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.

Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off
and on lamps illuminate for a short period
to confirm it is functional.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person is not sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This allows the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains lit
even after this, you should advise the
person to ride in the rear seat.

Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
•

•

When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the off lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp, then
switch your vehicle off, remove the
child restraint from your vehicle and
reinstall the restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.

Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off lamp illuminates, the passenger
side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled
to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
issues.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.

The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled.
•

If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.

When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp and remains
illuminated.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
Cargo interference with the seat
Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.

•

Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
this may or may not be a problem due
to the front passenger sensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.

The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the previous list.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center.

SIDE AIRBAGS

Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
E67017
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 50).

WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.

Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.

If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat, please take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.

Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.

WARNINGS
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The side airbags are on the outboard side
of the seatbacks of the front seats. The
airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.

SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

E152533

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the seatback of the
driver and front passenger seats.
• Front passenger sensing system.

·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.

Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow hooks
and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
or add equipment to the front end of your
vehicle.

E75004

The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment

Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front seatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, rear inflatable belts, seat
mounted side airbags, and the Safety
Canopy. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
E67017
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 50).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
101). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.

The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners and rear inflatable belts
is to activate in frontal, near-frontal
and side crashes, and in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:

E67017

•
•

The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.

The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.

If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: If you are within range of your vehicle,
the remote control will operate if you
unintentionally press any button.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorizes your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the unlock sensor on the
back of the door handle with the
intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m)
of your vehicle.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press the unlock button on the
transmitter.

Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 52).

The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.

REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)

Note: A two-button remote control
operates similarly.

The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.

Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.

Note: Make sure you lock your vehicle
before leaving it unattended.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E191532

Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.

E218399

The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
Removable Key Blade

E151795

The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E251885

E218400

1. Pull the handle and hold it.
2. While holding the handle outward,
identify the cylinder and insert the key
blade into the slot.
3. Actuate the cylinder to unlock or lock
the door.

Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.

E151795

Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.

Using the Key Blade

A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
119).

The key cylinder is under the driver side
door handle. To access the cylinder:

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.

E151800

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.

E191533

Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.

4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.

E151801

5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery cover.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E218400

Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.

E218401

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
E138625

This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 135). A manual
climate control system will run at the
setting it was set to when you switched
your vehicle off.

E218402

3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.

Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.

Car Finder
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.

The remote start system does not work
when any of the following conditions occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off in the
information display.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.

Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to

Remote Control Feedback

turn it off.

An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
57

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

LED

Status

Solid green

Remote start
successful

Solid red

Remote stop
successful

Blinking red

Request failed or
status not received

Blinking green

Status incomplete

The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 10
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend
the engine running time duration to a
maximum of 30 minutes.

Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.

Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting

E138625

Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.

You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.

E138626

The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:

You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).

Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.

Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access
key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 150).

The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 76).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

•

MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.

•

Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.

Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).

Note: When you switch lane departure
warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.

Configurable Settings

When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.

With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.

Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.

WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.

Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

MyKey™
•

•

Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches
the limits. Warnings appear in the
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit.
Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).

CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1.

Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 169). If your vehicle is
equipped with a push-button start,
place the remote control into the
backup position. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 76).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:

Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Create MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings

When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.

Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1.

Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:

MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

MyKey™

Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Use the arrow keys to select the desired
MyKey setting and press the OK button.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.

You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 109).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

Clear MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.

All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

MyKey™
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 109).

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist.

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} Admin Keys

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

MyKey™
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition

Potential Causes

I cannot create a MyKey.

The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place
the transmitter into the backup position. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 169).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
is the only admin key. There always has to be
at least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in
unlimited mode.

I cannot program the configurable
settings.

The transmitter used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).

I cannot clear the MyKeys.

The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey
(page 61).

I lost the only admin key.

Purchase a new key or transmitter from an
authorized dealer.

I lost a key.

Program a spare key or transmitter. You may
need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 76).

The MyKey distance does not accumu- The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
late.
An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the transmitter.

An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
There are no MyKeys programmed to your
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Remote Control

You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.

You can use the remote control at any
time. The liftgate release button only
operates when the speed is less than
3 mph (5 km/h).

Power Door Locks

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)

The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.

Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
E138629

Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
E138628

Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
A

Unlock.

Lock.

Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors unlock, or only the driver
door unlocks. Pressing the unlock button
again unlocks all the doors.

Door Lock Switch Inhibitor

Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
The direction indicators flash twice to
confirm the change. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access. You can
also change between the unlocking modes
using the information display. See
General Information (page 109).

When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior
trunk release switch will not operate after
20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle
with the remote control or keyless keypad,
or switch the ignition on, to restore function
to these switches. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.
Note: Switch the ignition on and off after
changing the setting in the information
display.

To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.

Rear Door Unlocking and Opening

Locking the Doors

Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.

E138623

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.

Doors and Locks
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 52).

Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.

Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock

E248553

If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 109).

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.

Opening the Liftgate
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.

Locking Using Intelligent Access

E138630

Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)

General Information
E248554

You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.

The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies jam.

At the Luggage Compartment
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, press the exterior
release button.

Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Doors and Locks
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)

To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.

This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock and the
horn sounds twice if the key is still in the
ignition.

When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).

You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
remote control.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
A key cylinder is located under the driver
side door handle. You can use your key
blade to manually lock and unlock the
driver side door. See Remote Control
(page 52).

Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.

Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle relocks and
the alarm sets. You can switch this feature
on or off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109).

When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key
inside your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock and the horn
will sound twice, indicating that a key is
inside.

Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Doors and Locks
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.

Autounlock

The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.

Illuminated Exit

Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off, or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.

The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.

Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.

Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.

Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it
shuts off when it detects a certain amount
of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.

Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 109).

KEYLESS ENTRY

Illuminated Entry (If Equipped)

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD

The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.

The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.

The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.

Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Doors and Locks
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•
•
•
•

Press 3·4 to save personal code 2
Press 5·6 to save personal code 3
Press 7·8 to save personal code 4
Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.

You may also program a personal entry
code through the information display.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.

E138637

You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.

Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.

Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.

All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.

The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
Displaying the Factory Set Code

The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.

Note: You need to have two programmed
keys for this procedure.
69

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Doors and Locks
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait for a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the intelligent access
key from the center console.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot in the center console,
then press the push button ignition
switch.

To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
1.

Insert a key into the ignition and switch
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code will display for a few
seconds.

The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.

Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.

Locking and Unlocking
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking mode. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 65).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver door closed). You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.

Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: Two programmed intelligent access
keys are required for this procedure.
1.

Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring facing upward,
place the first intelligent access key
into the backup slot inside the center
console.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Liftgate
Opening the Liftgate

MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

Manually Opening the Liftgate

WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the tailgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent passengers and
cargo from falling out. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.

E252962

Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
2. Pull the liftgate upward.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Remote Control
Press twice within three seconds
to unlatch the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.

E138630

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Liftgate
Closing the Liftgate

WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

A handle is inside the liftgate to help with
closing.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.

POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).

E252964

Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One tone sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three tones sound if the battery
voltage is below the minimum
operating voltage.
• One tone sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).

If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight
from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues
to close after opening, have the system
checked as soon as possible.

Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the tailgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent passengers and
cargo from falling out. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Liftgate
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

E252962

From the Instrument Panel

2. Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.

With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.
Remote Control
Press the button twice within a
few seconds.

Closing the Liftgate

E138630

WARNING

Outside Control

Keep clear of the liftgate when using
the rear switch.

Opening the Liftgate
1.

Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Liftgate
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until a tone
sounds, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
E252965

The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.

Press and release the liftgate control
button.

Disabling the Liftgate Button
You can disable the liftgate button under
the Advanced Settings menu. See
General Information (page 109).

Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.

Opening the Liftgate Window

When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.

See Liftgate Window (page 99).

Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.

Obstacle Detection
When Closing

You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.

The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the
system reverses to open. When you
remove the obstacle, you can power close
the liftgate.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Liftgate
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch

Note: Entering your vehicle when the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open when driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the
liftgate.

E253799

The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.

Using the Hands-Free Liftgate (If

Avoid the following actions when using
hands-free opening:

Equipped)

Make sure you have a passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.

•

•
•

Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
3. The liftgate power opens or closes.

Making physical contact with the
bumper.
Holding your foot under the bumper.
Sweeping your foot from side to side,
or kicking at an odd angle.

Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.

Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch

Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
passive key away from the rear bumper
detection area when you wash your vehicle.

E253664

The detection area is in the center of the
rear bumper.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Security
Replacement Keys

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two intelligent access keys.

Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.

If your programmed transmitters are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter

SecuriLock™

Note: You can program a maximum of
eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.

The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent
the engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.

You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle

If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.

Automatic Arming

You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.

The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded
key you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock
the doors with the touch handle you disarm
the alarm.

Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Security
1.
2.

3.
4.

8.
9.

Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.

You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.

If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.

E256153

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Access the backup slot.

Security
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
10. Once complete, the information
cluster displays a message
confirming the key has been
programmed. The direction indicators
flash and the horn sounds.

Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•

•
•

Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.

Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it
still does not work, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Automatic Power Deploy

USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Turn off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.

E166682

The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.

Automatic Power Stow
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.

When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.

Manual Power Deploy

Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.

You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 109).

Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.

Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
109).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
•

•

When disabled (OFF), the running
boards move to the stowed position
regardless of the door position.
When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.

Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position.

E180534

3. Lock the steering column.

E180482

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Steering Wheel
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves to the full up and in
position when you switch the ignition off.
It returns to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.

AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:

E191327

E180535

Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control
• Telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.

Volume up.

Media.

Seek up or next.

Volume down.

Seek down or previous.

Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.

Memory Feature

Seek, Next or Previous

You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or previous track.

Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.

Type Two

VOICE CONTROL

E248613

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 228).

INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL

E191328

Mute.

Voice recognition.

End call.

Answer or make a call.

See your SYNC information.

CRUISE CONTROL
Type One

E191336

See Information Displays (page 109).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)

See your SYNC information.

E191329

See Using Cruise Control (page 227).
83

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Pedals
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)

WARNING
Never use the pedal adjustment
controls when your feet are on the
accelerator or brake pedal when the
vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.

E176213

Farther.

Closer.

You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 150).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wipers and Washers
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.

The feature uses a rain sensor that is in the
area around the interior mirror. The rain
sensor monitors the amount of moisture
on the windshield and turns on the wipers.
It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on
and off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109).

E252762

•
•

Rotate away from you for a short wipe
interval.
Rotate toward you for a long wipe
interval.

E205527

Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers:

Speed Dependent Wipers

•

When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.

AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)

•

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

Rotate toward you for low sensitivity,
the wipers operate when the sensor
detects a large amount of water on the
windshield.
Rotate away from you for high
sensitivity, the wipers operate when
the sensor detects a small amount of
water on the windshield.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wipers and Washers
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.

In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.

Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also
operates the front camera washer.

Autowipers Settings

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS

Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch them off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Rear Window Wiper Blade

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.

E205529

Rotate the control to switch to select:
Position

Interval Length

Short wipe interval.

Long wipe interval.

Off.

E205528

•
•

•

Rear Window Washer

A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.

Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear
window washer. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period
of time.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.

E142449

Off.

Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.

Headlamps.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.

Headlamp High Beam

Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E167827

Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Lighting
Headlamp Flasher

The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.

The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.

AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.

Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER

E142451

When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
E231828

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Lighting
Type Two - Configurable

Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.

Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109).

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.

After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If

The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.

Equipped)

If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.

WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
high beams on or off.

Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.

The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Lighting
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.

E142451

Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 88).

A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.

Overriding the System
When you switch on the high beams,
pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.

Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).

Automatic High Beam Indicator (If
Equipped)

The indicator lamp illuminates
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist.

The high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
109).

E142453

Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Lighting
Front Interior Lamps

You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.

Type One

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E163272

•
•

To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops.
To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.

E201074

INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

All lamps on.

Door function.

All lamps off.

Individual dome lamps.

Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps

Type Two

E182517

Driver map lamp.

Passenger map lamp.

E205851

Door function.

All lamps on.

Individual dome lamps.

E199027

Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.

Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
The parking lamps operate with the ignition
on or off.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See your SYNC information.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back

POWER WINDOWS

The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.

WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

When closing the power windows,
verify they are free of obstruction and
make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.

Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.

Window Lock

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
E144072

One-Touch Down
Press the control to open the window.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.

One-Touch Up

Accessory Delay

Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.

The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Global Closing (If Equipped)

GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING

Vehicles Without Keyless Entry

You can also operate the power windows
with the ignition off using the global
opening and global closing function.

WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
Failure to follow this warning could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. In an emergency, press the lock or
unlock button immediately to stop.

Note: Global opening will only operate for
a short period of time after you have
unlocked your vehicle using the remote
control.
Note: Global closing will only operate if you
have set the memory correctly for each
window. See Power Windows (page 93).

Global Opening (If Equipped)

E71956

To close all the windows and the
moonroof, press and hold the remote
control lock button for at least three
seconds. Press the lock or unlock button
to stop the closing function. The
bounce-back function is also on during
global closing.

E71955

To open all the windows and vent the
moonroof:
1.

Press and release the remote control
unlock button.
2. Press and hold the remote control
unlock button for at least three
seconds.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop the
opening function.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Vehicles With Keyless Entry

E176219
E87384

WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
In an emergency, touch a door
handle lock sensor to stop.
Note: Global closing can be switched on
using the driver’s door handle. Global
opening and closing can also be switched
on using the buttons on the passive key.

Left-hand mirror.

Right-hand mirror.

Adjustment control.

Window lockout.

Power-folding mirror control.

To adjust a mirror:
1.

Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control will light.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again.

To close all the windows and the
moonroof, press and hold the driver’s door
handle for at least three seconds. The
bounce-back function is also on during
global closing.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors

Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), turn off the
vehicle, open and close the driver's side
door and lock the vehicle. The exterior
mirrors automatically unfold and return to
their driving position after you unlock the
vehicle and open and close the driver's side
door.

Note: Do not use an ice scraper on the
mirror glass or housing.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors

You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 109).

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
142).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 150).

Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims with the auto-dimming interior mirror.

Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

E170431

You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
located on the door. The control lights and
the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.

The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.

Puddle Lamps

(If Equipped)

The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.

Note: If you use the power-folding control
to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto
fold feature is switched on, you must use
the control again to unfold them.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

Loose Mirror

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 240).

If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.

360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 225).

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)

WARNING
Objects in the mirror are closer than
they appear.

To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
96

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle. The blind spot mirror
is only on the driver exterior mirror.

The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.

INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.

You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.

Auto-Dimming Mirror

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.

The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.

E138665

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
CHILDMINDER MIRROR

SUN VISORS

On overhead consoles, the childminder
mirror allows the driver to view the rear
seating area.
WARNING
Do not use the childminder mirror to
view rearward traffic, do not allow
rear passengers to distract you from
the driving task, and make sure the rear
view mirror has a clear view of rearward
traffic. Failure to do so could increase the
risk of a crash from an unseen vehicle,
which may result in serious injury.

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF - VEHICLES WITH:
VISTA ROOF OPENING PANEL

E190497

Pull down the rear edge of the childminder
mirror to open. You can adjust the
childminder mirror to any position up to
full open to aid in visibility.

WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.

closed. Note: The sunshade
stops short of its fully opened
position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the
sunshade fully, press the control
again.

The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
Note: The sunshade does not
fully close unless the moonroof
glass is fully closed.

Moonroof close. Press and
release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent
positions.

Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two
seconds after the roof comes to a stop
following a bounce-back reversal.
E191272

LIFTGATE WINDOW

Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.

Moonroof vent. Press and
release to vent the moonroof.

Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof

Opening the Liftgate Window
Note: To avoid vehicle damage, use care
when operating the liftgate when the
liftgate window is open.

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors
With the Outside Control Button

E252961

1. Press the release button.
2. Pull the liftgate glass upward.
With the Keypad
The liftgate window also opens with the
keypad. See Keyless Entry (page 68).

100

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2

E219638

Engine oil pressure gauge.

Engine coolant temperature gauge.

Fuel gauge.

Transmission fluid temperature gauge.

Speedometer.

Information display. See General Information (page 109).

Tachometer.

101

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
Type 3

E219651

Engine oil pressure gauge.

Engine coolant temperature gauge.

Fuel gauge.

Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature or turbo boost.

Speedometer.

Information display. See General Information (page 109).

Tachometer.

102

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.

Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop your vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.

After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
•

Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

•

WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

•

Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.

It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty value reaches 50 mi
(80 km) to empty, with additional
warnings at 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
and 0 mi (0 km) to empty, provided the
message is cleared each time. An
additional warning at 75 mi (120 km) to
empty is provided when the MyKey is being
used.

Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.

Variations:
Note: The distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending
on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.

103

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
Driving type (fuel economy
conditions)

Distance-to-empty

Fuel gauge position

Highway driving

50 mi (80 km)

1/8th tank

Severe duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)

50 mi (80 km)

1/4 tank

Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS

Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted such as snow or debris
blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
off-road use). See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
(page 495). Operating the transmission for
extended periods with the gauge in the
higher than normal area may cause
internal transmission damage. You need
to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission
temperature into the normal range. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.

The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator
(If Equipped)

E144524

It illuminates when you switch
the system on.

It illuminates white when the
system is in standby mode. It illuminates
green when you set the adaptive cruise
speed.

Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 228).

Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.

Airbag Warning Lamp
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, continues
E67017
to flash or remains on when the
engine is running, this indicates a
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.

104

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp

WARNING

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.

Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the system
automatically turns the
headlamp high beam on.

E138644

Auto-Start-Stop Indicator (If Equipped)

E146361

If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

It illuminates when the engine
has automatically stopped. It
flashes to inform you when the
engine needs to restart. The
indicator is shown with a
strikethrough if the system is not

Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped)

available.

Illuminates when the fuel cap
may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light
on may cause the service engine soon
warning indicator to come on.

See Auto-Start-Stop (page 174).

Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.

Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
E71340

Blind Spot Information System
Indicator (If Equipped)

E151262

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.

See Using Cruise Control
(page 227).

It illuminates when you switch
the system off.

Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard flashers.
Flashes during operation. An increase in
the rate of flashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb.

See Blind Spot Information
System (page 240).

105

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar Warning Lamp

Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged.

Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.

E181780

Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged.
E181779

Electric Park Brake

Front Fog Lamp Indicator

Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
E146190
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 203).

It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.

Headlamp High Beam Indicator

Electronic Limited Slip Differential

It illuminates when you switch
the headlamp high beam on.

(If Equipped)

E163170

Illuminates when using the
electronic limited slip
differential.

Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Hood Ajar

E246598

Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp

Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp

E71880

It illuminates and a chime
sounds until you fasten the
seatbelts.

E162453

It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
the liftgate is open.

Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp

Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If

If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.

Equipped)

Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp

Illuminates momentarily when
you select two-wheel drive high.

Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.

E181778

E181781

Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.

Illuminates when the automatic
four-wheel drive system is
engaged.

106

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.

It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.

Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

See Catalytic Converter (page 184).

Stability Control and Traction
Control Indicator
Flashes during operation.
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or remains
on when the engine is running, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
E138639

See Engine Oil Check (page 317).

Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control

Note: The system automatically turns off
if there is a malfunction.

Illuminates when a powertrain
or a 4WD fault has been
detected. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

See Using Stability Control (page 209).

Stability Control and Traction
Control Off Warning Lamp

Service Engine Soon

It illuminates when you switch
the system off.

If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.

E130458

Tow Haul Indicator
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature has been activated. If the
E246592
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately, damage to
the transmission could occur.

If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.

107

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Instrument Cluster
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you leave the key in the
ignition and the driver door open.

Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver door is
open.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.

Direction Indicator Chime
Sounds when you leave the direction
indicator on after signaling a turn and
driving the vehicle more than 1.5 miles (2.4
km).

108

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING

Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.

This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
E204495
check in the box indicates the
feature is on, and unchecked indicates the
feature is off.

Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and 2)
•

Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.

•
•

Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.

Type 1
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings

109

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays

Trip 1
Digital Speed
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
Outside Temp
•
•
•
•
•
•

Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Trip Odometer - Registers the distance of individual trips.
Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips.
DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Outside Temp - Shows the outside air temperature.

Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1.

Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
•
•
•
•
•

Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time.
Average Speed - Shows the average speed the vehicle has driven.
Auto StartStop - Shows the Auto StartStop status.

Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.

110

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays

Driver Assist
Prog Range Sel
Engine Hours

Engine Hours
Engine Idle

Hill Strt Asst.
Park Lock
Tire Pressure
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
Brake Type

Select Your Setting

Brake Effort

Trailer Sway
1 Trailer

setting.

Settings
Vehicle

DTE Calculate
Lighting
Locks
Neutral Tow
Oil Life Reset
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Controls

MyKey

MyKey Status
Create MyKey
911 Assist
Do Not Disturb

111

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Settings
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Clear MyKeys
Display Setup Units
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Type 2
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings

Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer

112

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Display Mode
Engine Information
Transmission Temp.
•
•
•
•
•

Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in your specified unit.
Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
Transmission Temp. - Shows the transmission temperature value.

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Compass

Select Your Setting

Average Speed
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, distance and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also
shows DTE.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average fuel
economy and DTE.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows
DTE.
Auto StartStop
• Shows the Auto StartStop status.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.

113

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Towing
Trailer Status Trailer Status
Trailer Light Check
Trailer
Options

Trailer Sway Control
Select Trailer
Change Trailer Settings
Add Trailer

Connection Checklist

Off Road
Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Off Road Status - Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
Power Distribution - Displays a graphic of the power distribution between the front and
rear wheels.

Settings
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
DTE Calculation

Select Your Setting

Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Advanced
Settings

Vehicle
MyKey
Display Setup

114

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 3) (If Equipped)

•

•
•
•

E219639

Type 3
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Vehicle Info
Towing
Off Road
Settings

115

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays

MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Configure
MyView
•
•
•
•

Add/Remove Screens
Reorder Screens

Trip 1/2 - Shows your trip timer, fuel used, trip odometer and average fuel economy.
Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage and average fuel economy.
Tire Pressure - Shows your car outline with tire pressure values.
Off Road Status - Shows your pitch and roll screen.

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Navigation/Compass

116

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Compass Select Your Setting
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Odo - Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
fuel economy.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
Auto StartStop
• Shows the Auto StartStop status.

Vehicle Info
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
Transmission Temp
•
•
•
•
•

Gauge View - Allows you to select between either Turbo Boost or Transmission
Temp gauge.
Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 359).
Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
Transmission Temp - Shows the transmission temperature value.

117

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays

Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Towing
Status

% Grade, steering angle, gain and output display

Trailer
Information

Trailer Name, Accumulated Distance, Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Status,
Trailer BLIS Status and Trailer Blind Spot

Trailer
Light
Check

Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
trailer.

Trailer Tire
Pressure

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.

Trailer
Setup

Trailer Sway Control
Select trailer
Change Trailer Settings
Add Trailer

Connection Checklist

Settings
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot

118

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Pre-Collision Alert Sensitivity
Collision Warning
Cruise
Control

Select Your Setting

DTE Calculation
Lane
Keeping
System

Mode

Advanced
Settings

Vehicle

Alert Intensity

MyKey
Display Setup

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.

E184451

Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.

Active Park
Message

Action

Active Park Fault

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.

119

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message

Action

Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Cruise Control (page 227).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available

A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Cruise Control (page 227).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Cruise Control (page 227).

Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off

The system has disabled the automatic braking.

Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control

The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.

Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate

Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.

Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down

The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.

AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
Message

Action

Service AdvanceTrac

The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AdvanceTrac Off

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.

AdvanceTrac On

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.

120

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE

The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.

Traction Control Off

The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 207).

Traction Control On

The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 207).

Airbag
Message

Action

Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.

Alarm and Security
Message

Action

Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 78).

Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message

Action

Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds

The engine is getting ready to shut off.

Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.

Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.

121

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message

Action

Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off

The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.

Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
Battery
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message

Action

Blindspot System Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual

The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 240).

Vehicle Coming From X

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 240).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 240).

Cross Traffic System
Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

122

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 240).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
ated Trailer Attached
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 240).
Trailer Blind Spot Not
available Due to Invalid
Trailer

Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or gooseneck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
longer than 33 ft (10 m).

Collision Warning System
Message

Action

Collision Warning
Malfunction

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.

Collision Warning Not
Available

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Doors and Locks
Message

Action

X Door Ajar

The door(s) listed is not completely closed.

123

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Driver Alert
Message

Action

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested

Take a rest soon.

Drivetrain
Message

Action

Check Electronic Limited
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system
Slip Differential
encounters a hardware failure. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Off See
Owner's Manual

Displays if an electronic limited slip differential system fault
is present. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Restored to
Normal

Displays when the electronic limited slip differential system
resumes normal function.

Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Temporarily
Disabled

Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system
temporarily turns off due to overheating or an undersized
spare tire. If an undersized spare tire is installed, replace the
spare tire with a full-sized tire as soon as possible. If not, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and allow the system to cool.

Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Reduced
Torque

Displays if the electronic limited slip differential has limited
functionality. This could be due to an undersized spare tire
or caused by the system overheating. If an undersized spare
tire is installed, replace the spare tire with a full-sized tire as
soon as possible. If an undersized spare tire is not installed,
the vehicle has reduced functionality. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

124

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Locking
Feature Not Available

Displays when you select a drive mode that does not allow
the electronic limited slip differential to turn on. This may
also display when the electronic limited slip differential has
a fault and the vehicle requests the locking feature.

Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral

The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.

Neutral Tow Disabled

The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.

Engine
Message

Action

Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp

The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.

Four-Wheel Drive
Message

Action

Check 4x4

A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

4x4 Shift in Progress

The 4X4 system is making a shift.

For 4x4 LOW Shift to N

Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).

For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH

Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N

Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).

To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Shift Delayed Pull Forward

May display when there is a transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.

125

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

4x4 Temporarily Disabled

Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to
excessive stress. The system automatically turns on
the clutch after it cools.

4x4 Restored

Displays when the 4X4 system has been restored to
its original setting.

4x4 Temporarily Locked

Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on
4H from 4A after detecting driving conditions that
require greater 4X4 performance. The system automatically returns to 4A after the system no longer detects
these driving conditions.

Fuel
Message

Action

Fuel Level Low

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

Keys and Intelligent Access
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.

No Key Detected

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 168).

Restart Now or Key is
Needed

You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.

Full Accessory Power
Active

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.

Starting System Fault

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.

Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.

126

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Max Number of Keys
Learned

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.

Not Enough Keys
Learned

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.

Engine ON

Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.

Lane Keeping System
Message

Action

Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

Front Camera Temporarily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.

Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
tion Service Required
as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel
wheel.

Maintenance
Message

Action

Low Engine Oil Pressure

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Change Engine Oil Soon

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See General
Maintenance Information (page 489).

Oil Change Required

The oil life left is at 0%. See General Maintenance Information (page 489).

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).

127

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Check Brake System

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer.

See Manual

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.

MyKey
Message

Action

MyKey not Created

You did not program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.

Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.

Check Speed Drive
Safely

You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.

Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.

AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.

Traction Control On MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.

MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.

Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.

128

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Off Road
Message

Action

Hill Descent Control Active

Hill descent control mode is active.

Hill Descent Control OFF

Hill descent control mode is inactive.

For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less

Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.

For Hill Descent Select Gear

You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.

Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control

Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.

Hill Descent Control Fault

A hill descent system fault is present.

Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling

The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.

Hill Descent Control Ready

The hill descent control system is ready.

Park Aid
Message

Action

Check Front Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
212).

Check Rear Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
212).

Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Rear Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

129

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Front Park Aid Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual

Displays if the front park aid sensor is blocked.

Rear Park Aid Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual

Displays if the rear park aid sensor is blocked.

Park Aid Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual

Displays if the park aid sensor is blocked.

Park Brake
Message

Action

To Release: Press Brake
and Switch

The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.

Park Brake Use Switch
to Release

The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.

Release Park Brake

The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.

Park Brake Not Applied

The electric park brake is not fully applied.

Park Brake Not Released

The electric park brake is not fully released.

Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
Mode
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required

The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

130

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Power Steering
Message

Action

Steering Fault Service
Now

The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering Loss Stop
Safely

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault
Service Required

The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now

The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Message

Action

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ can only be activated when
Active Stop Vehicle to Activate
the vehicle is stopped.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Locating Sticker Please wait...
Press Knob to Exit

Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the
sticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer
Backup Assist.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
now Maximum trailer angle
Press Knob to Exit

Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ has reached
max trailer angle.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
Now Take Control of Steering
Wheel

Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ is no longer
controlling steering.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Reduce Speed Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit

Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit
speed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ feature.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
System is Not Available

Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ operation
are not met. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 264).

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Remove Hands from Steering
Wheel to Activate Press Knob
to Exit

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ cannot operate with hands
on wheel. Remove hands to activate.

131

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Cancelled by Driver Take
Control of Steering Wheel

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ knob has been pushed to
deactivate the system.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available in
to Reverse to Activate. Press
reverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate.
Knob to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Shift to Park
Press Knob to Exit

Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Refer to
Owner's Manual. Press Knob to
Exit

Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Trailer
Reversing Aids (page 264).

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Drive Straight Forward to Calibrate. Press Knob to Exit

Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight
forward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist™.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Calibration Complete Stop
Vehicle

The system has completed calibration. Stop the
vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ feature.

Remote Start
Message

Action

To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button

A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.

Seats
Message

Action

Memory Recall Not
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.

132

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Starting System
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.

Engine Start Pending
Please Wait

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.

Pending Start Cancelled

The system has cancelled the pending start.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Action

Tire Pressure Low

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 359).

Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 359).

Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 359). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trailer
Message

Action

Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}

The current gain setting for the trailer brake.

Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer

The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.

Trailer Brake Module Fault

Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 263).

Trailer Connected

A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.

133

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Trailer Disconnected

A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.

Trailer Sway Reduce Speed

The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.

Trailer Wiring Fault

There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 263).

Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.

Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.

Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual

There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 263).

Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual

There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 263).

Trailer Tire Low Specified:

One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.

Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected

The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.

Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See General Information (page 109).

Transmission
Message

Action

Transmission Not in Park

A reminder to shift into park.

134

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)

E246798

Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Defrost: Press to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the instrument panel
or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of
these vents.

A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air
conditioning.

MAX A/C: Turn to the left for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air
conditioning.

MAX Defrost: Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air flows through the
windshield vents and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated
rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.

135

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
H

Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air
flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot
weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.

Rear passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting for
the rear passenger compartment.

Rear control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger
settings through the front controls.

Rear passenger power: Press to switch the rear system on and off.

Rear fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated to the rear
passenger compartment.

Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 142).

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
Note: The touchscreen system controls
some of the climate features. See your
SYNC information.

E246801

136

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
A

Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the driver
side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

Rear climate: Press to access additional touchscreen controls for the rear
climate system.

MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. The driver and passenger settings
set to HI, air flows through the windshield vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield
of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.

Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield,
instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.

Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 142).

Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the
passenger side.

DUAL: Press to switch on temperature control for the passenger side of the
vehicle. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same
as the driver settings.

Heated seats: Press to cycle through the various heat settings and off. See
Heated Seats (page 157).

137

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
L

Ventilated seats: Press to cycle through the various ventilation settings and
off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 158).

MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. The driver and passenger settings set
to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed.

Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation and cycle through the automatic
fan settings, then adjust the temperature control to select the desired
temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding
for more than two seconds.

Heated steering wheel: Press to switch the heated steering wheel on and off.

Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Automatic Fan Settings

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE

The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air to maintain the
desired temperature.

General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.

The AUTO button illuminates for the
following settings:
• When three indicators are on, there are
no limits on the fan speed so that you
reach the selected temperature as
quickly as possible with the highest
amount of cabin noise.
• When two indicators are on, there are
moderate limits on the fan speed so
that you reach the selected
temperature with a reduced amount
of cabin noise.
• When one indicator is on, there are
lower limits on the fan speed so that
you reach the selected temperature
with the least amount of cabin noise.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.

Note: The system starts at the previous fan
setting when you switch on AUTO.

138

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
Manual Climate Control

Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.

Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.

Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.

Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Recommended Settings for Heating
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

139

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Select MAX A/C.

Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.

Recommended Settings for Cooling
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
distribution buttons.

Press A/C.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

140

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS (If Equipped)
Manual Climate Control

E246802

Rear fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated to the rear
passenger compartment.

Rear passenger power: Press to switch the rear system on and off.

Rear control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger
settings through the front controls.

Rear air distribution control: Press to switch the direction of airflow.

Rear passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting for
the rear passenger compartment.

141

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control

E246803

Rear fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated to the rear
passenger compartment.

Rear passenger power: Press to switch the rear system on and off.

Rear control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger
settings through the front controls.

Rear air distribution control: Press to switch the direction of airflow.

Rear passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting for
the rear passenger compartment.

Rear heated seats: Press to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 157).

Rear AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation.

Heated Rear Window

HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS

Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear
window turns off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it
off.
E72507

Note: Make sure the vehicle is running
before operating the heated windows.

142

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Climate Control
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.

Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.

REMOTE START (If Equipped)

When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.

The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.

You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.

Windshield Wiper De-icer (If Equipped)

You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.

The windshield wiper de-icer turns on in
low temperatures.

CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.

Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.

You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.

In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display). The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.

Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 489).

143

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.

The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.

144

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Removing the Head Restraint

Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.

Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Note: You cannot remove front seat head
restraints that have entertainment system
video screens.

Front Seat Manual Head
Restraints

Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Manual Head Restraints (If
Equipped)
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:

E138642

The head restraints consist of:
A

An energy absorbing foam and
structure.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

Adjusting the Head Restraint
E144727

Raising the Head Restraint

Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.

Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.

After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.

145

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Installing the Head Restraint

Second Row Outermost Head
Restraints

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.

The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them
rearward.

Note: Make sure the head restraint fold
button is facing the outboard side of the
seat.
Folding the Head Restraint
1.

Press button D to fold the head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it
back to the upright position.
Second Row Center Seat Head
Restraint

E257663

The head restraints consist of:

E138645

An energy absorbing foam and
structure.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

An energy absorbing foam and
structure.

Two steel stems.

A fold button.

Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.

Removing the Head Restraint

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

The head restraints consist of:

1. Press and hold both C buttons.
2. Pull the head restraint up.

Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.

146

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Power Rear Head Restraints (If
Equipped)

Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.

The third row outermost head restraints
are fixed and cannot be removed.

Removing the Head Restraint
1.

Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
E255798

Third Row Head Restraints

Press the button on the head restraint or
the button on the liftgate to fold the third
row outermost head restraints. Pull the
head restraint up to place it in the upright
position.

The third row head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them.

Note: These head restraints fold when you
press the fold flat button.

MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or seat
backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.

E193964

The head restraints consist of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure.
• A fold button.

Make sure the seat fully locks into
place by rocking it backward and
forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in a
crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.

Folding the Head Restraint
1.

Press the button to fold the head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it
back in the upright position.

147

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward

Manual Lumbar

(If Equipped)

E205042
E175314

The lumbar support control is on the
outboard side of the seat. Turn the control
to adjust your support.

Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
WARNING

POWER SEATS (If Equipped)

Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.

WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or seat
backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

E175315

148

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats

E176038

Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.

Power Lumbar

Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seatback and cushion
are both active, the massage will alternate
between zones

E176039

Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system turns off after
20 minutes.

E156301

149

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats

Massage mode

Lumbar and bolster mode

Back massage intensity
adjustment

Upper lumbar

Massage intensity decrease

Lumbar decrease

and off
C

Cushion massage intensity
adjustment

Lower lumbar

Massage intensity increase

Lumbar increase

On and off

The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
lumbar mode.

MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.

Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make
adjustments to the lumbar setting:

Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.

•
•
•
•

To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:

The memory control is on the driver door.

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.

150

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driver seat.
Power mirrors.
Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
Optional power adjustable steering
column.

Seats
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.

Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
E142554

With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.

Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position

To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.

Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.

Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to recall a memory position.

Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) if
the ignition is on.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm)
when you switch the ignition off.

You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.

The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
General Information (page 109).

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.

151

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
REAR SEATS
Folding the Second Row 40% Seat
WARNING
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.

E246709

Lift the seat backrest toward the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seat backrest until you hear
a click, locking it in the upright position.

Adjusting the Second Row
Outboard 40% Seat for Easy Entry
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle with a seat
that is unlatched or in the folded
position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.

E246710

Locate the handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
2. Pull up on the handle to fold the seat
backrest. To increase cargo space, the
seat backrest also moves forward and
the seat cushion moves forward and
down.
Note: Use caution when folding the seat
backrest to the flat position as the seat
moves forward when you lift the release
handle.

Check under the seat cushion to
make sure no cargo or objects are
under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.

To return the seat to the upright position:

152

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Note: You can move the outboard seats
forward to allow access to the third row
seats.
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
to and from the third row seat.

E257686

1. Pull the lever.
2. Tilt the seat and slide the complete
seat forward.

E246708

153

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
3. When exiting your vehicle from the
third row seats, pull the lever up on the
upper corner of the outboard seats.
4. To return the seat to the seating
position, slide the seat rearward while
pulling down on the seat backrest until
the latch fully engages.
5. To move the seat further back, pull the
lever under the front of the seat and
slide it backward.
Note: You must move the seat to the full
forward position before you move it
rearward. Otherwise, the seat may not slide
properly rearward.

The easy entry seat allows for easier entry
and exit to and from the third row seat.

Note: You can slide the outboard seats
forward when using a child restraint.

E247495

Press the button on the rear quarter
trim panel to unlock the rear of the
seat.
2. Push the seat forward to gain access
to the third row seat.

Power Easy Entry (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle with a seat
that is unlatched or in the folded
position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.

Reclining the Second Row
Outboard 40% Seat Backrest
WARNING
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.

E247681

The release handle is on the outboard side
of the seat cushion. Lift it to adjust the seat
backrest to your desired position.

154

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Folding the Second Row Center
20% Seat (If Equipped)

Adjusting the Second-Row Center
20% Seat (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or seatbelts, make sure that the
seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.

Note: Move this seat forward to keep a
child in a child restraint close to the front
seat occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.

E247034

Lift the handle to move the seat forward
or backward.

Power Folding Rear Seats (If Equipped)
Note: The power fold seats operate for 10
minutes after you switch the ignition off.
The transmission must be in park (P) and
the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open.
Similar to the battery saver feature, the
power rear seat disable 10 minutes after you
switch the ignition off.

E247331

The release handle is in the upper right seat
backrest. Pull the handle to release the
folding seat latch.

Note: Be sure the third-row center head
restraint is in the lowered position before
you power the rear seats down. The
third-row outermost head restraints fold
automatically when you press the fold
button.

To return the seat to the upright position,
rotate the seat backrest until you hear a
click, locking it in the upright position.
Note: Use the same release handle to
recline the seat backrest.

The control buttons are on the left-hand
rear quarter trim panel (accessible from
the liftgate area).

155

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
With Second-Row Bench Seats

Folds the right-hand third-row
seat.

Folds the left-hand second-row
seat.

Folds the second-row bench
center seat or both second-row
captain chair seats.

Folds the right-hand second-row
seat.

To return the second-row seat backrest to
the original position, rotate the seat
backrest up until it latches in the upright
position. The seat backrest clicks when it
is locked into position.
To return the third-row seat backrest to
the original position, press the
corresponding control again.

E257920

If the power rear seat is disabled after 10
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.

With Second-Row Captain Chairs

Folding Down the Rear Seats to the
Load Floor
WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or seatbelts, make sure that the
seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

E246705

Folds the left-hand third-row
seat.

Folds both third-row seats.

The third-row seats have obstacle
detection that prevents the seats from
folding or returning if they are obstructed.

156

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Power Recline

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)

WARNING

Front Seats

Do not recline a rear seat on which a
child restraint is installed. Failure to
follow this instruction could reduce
the effectiveness of the child restraint.

WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

The third-row power recline buttons are
on the quarter trim panel on each side of
the vehicle.

E246706

Moves the seat backrest
rearward.

Moves the seat backrest
forward.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

157

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
Rear Seats

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.

The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated,
they will turn off automatically when you
turn the engine off.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)

Heated Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.

Note: The heated seats switch on during a
remote start if they are enabled through the
information displays. See General
Information (page 109).
Note: The heated seats may also switch
on when you start your vehicle if they were
on when you previously switched your
vehicle off.

E146322

Note: Do not do the following:

158

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Seats
•
•

Place heavy objects on the seat.
Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Note: To improve comfort, use the
ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.

E146322

Press this symbol to cycle through the
various heat settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate warmer settings.

Ventilated Seats
Note: The ventilated seats switch on during
a remote start if they are enabled through
the information displays. See General
Information (page 109).
Note: The ventilated seats may also switch
on when you start your vehicle if they were
on when you previously switched your
vehicle off.
Note: Do not do the following:
•

•

Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.

The ventilated seats only function when
the engine is running.

E224689

159

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.

E188211

The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.

Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.

Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.

In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.

Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.

Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.

160

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

E188212

With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.

Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.

161

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E188212

E188213

3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.

Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.

Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming

Reprogramming a Single Button

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.

To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1.

Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.

Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.

For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

162

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

163

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point

Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.

WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.

WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.

If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.

Note: The power point turns off when you
switch off the ignition, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.

Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.

You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.

E247586

164

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.

Note: Devices without built-in Qi or Power
Matters Alliance (PMA) wireless charging
receivers require an additional Qi or PMA
receiver or sleeve.

The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.

Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.

The system supports one Qi or PMA
wireless charging compatible device on
the charging area.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.

Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance.

Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.

Note: Consumer electronics regulate
charging and operation at different
temperatures and may exhibit varying
behavior. The charging port terminates a
charge if the device exceeds industry limits.

WIRELESS CHARGING (If Equipped)
WARNING

E250812

Wireless charging devices can affect
the operation of implanted medical
devices, including cardiac
pacemakers. If you have any implanted
medical devices, we recommend that you
consult with your physician.

The charging area is on the center console
or lower instrument panel. See Center
Console (page 167).
You can charge a device if the vehicle is off
when in accessory mode or if SYNC is on.

165

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
Place the device with the charging side
down to begin charging. The charging
stops after your device reaches a full
charge.

Note: If the system detects a foreign object
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
area, a message appears in the display.

Message

Behavior

Description

Wireless Charger Active

Message on screen display
or pop-up window.

Charging occurs after you
switch the vehicle on or after
a charging disruption.

Charging Terminated
Phone misaligned or object
between phone and charger
detected. Correct the condition to resume charging.

Pop-up window.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
• This device may not cause interference,
and
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

166

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

The system stops charging
your device if the system
detects the phone is
misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the charging surface.

Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:

E224352

Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.

E248043

Front storage compartment with
auxiliary power point, wireless
charging port, and USB ports.

Cup holders.

Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point.

Rear cup holders.

Rear audio controls.

AC power point.

Auxiliary power point.

Rear climate controls.

Rear storage compartment.

USB ports.

Switch pack.

167

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

E252522

A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.

B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.

The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.

D (start) - Cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)

When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.

Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.

168

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.

STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE

Ignition Modes

When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.

E144447

The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•

Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but your
vehicle is not moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button twice.

Start: Starts the engine.
•

Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
169

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Vehicles with Keyless Start

3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).

Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.

Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch.
After 20 seconds, you can no longer start
your vehicle if it does not detect a valid
passive key.

If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:

Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.

Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.

Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if
it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information

E256153

1. Access the backup slot.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.

170

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
your vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.

Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.

Automatic Engine Shutdown Override

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving

Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.

Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.

WARNING
Switching off the engine when your
vehicle is still moving results in a
significant decrease in braking
assistance. Higher effort is required to
apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
required to steer your vehicle. When you
switch the ignition off, some electrical
circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
If you unintentionally switch the ignition
off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.

You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Vehicles with Keyless Start

1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.

171

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.

WARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.

Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).

172

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•

•

Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

173

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Unique Driving Characteristics
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
109).

AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically stopping and restarting
the engine when your vehicle has stopped.
The engine restarts automatically when
you release the brake pedal.

Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system automatically enables every
time you start your vehicle if:

In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.

•
•

Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.

•
•
•
•
•

Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short
time after a refuel event while the system
is verifying the fuel type being used.
WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.

•
•

•

Before opening the hood or
performing any maintenance, fully
apply the parking brake, shift into
park (P) or neutral (N) and switch the
ignition off.

•

Always switch the ignition off before
leaving the vehicle. If the ignition is
switched on an automatic restart
may occur at any time.

•
•
•
•

The system may require the engine
to automatically restart when the
auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.

•
•

174

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
button (not illuminated).
Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have
initially started your vehicle.
You have stopped your vehicle.
Your foot is on the brake pedal.
The driver door is closed.
There is adequate brake vacuum.
The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
The front windshield defroster is off.
You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
Elevation is below about 11,000 ft
(3,350 m).
Ambient temperature is moderate.
The trailer is not connected.
If you select Normal, Eco, Snow/Wet
or Grass/Gravel/Snow modes.
You are not in 4H or 4L.
You have not selected Manual shift
mode.

Unique Driving Characteristics
•
•

Hill descent control is not active.
You have not selected Tow haul, Sport,
Sand or Mud/Rut modes.

Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have increased the blower fan
speed or changed the climate control
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory
turned on or plugged in.

Note: Note when in Sport mode it can be
enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop
button.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.

Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.

Disabling Auto-Start-Stop

If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
E146361
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it illuminates when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You have exceeded the maximum
engine off time.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
• The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.

E181352

Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. Deactivating
using the button lasts only 1 key cycle.
Press the button again to restore
Auto-Start-Stop function.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
Information Displays (page 109).
If your vehicle is in an engine off
Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to
neutral (N) will not cause a restart while
the brake pedal is not pressed, the
message Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to
Start Engine will appear. You must press
the brake pedal within 60 seconds or a
shift to park (P) and a manual restart will
be required.

175

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

•

WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.

•

The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.

•

Fuels can cause serious injury or
death if misused or mishandled.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

•

Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.

Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.

FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

176

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. We do not recommend
these fuels.

Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 263).

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.

Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that will not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.

Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).

Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.

The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.

177

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.

Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container

E157452

WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.

Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.

REFUELING
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 177).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1.

Fully open the fuel filler door.

178

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
E206911

Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.

Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.

Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.

Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.

Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.

Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.

179

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fully open the fuel filler door.

Fuel and Refueling
A

E206912

4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.

E139202

Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor opens.

E119081

5. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.

2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.

System Warnings (If Equipped)
If the fuel filler inlet does not fully close a
warning message appears in the
information display.
E139203

3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.

2.
3.
4.
5.

180

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Apply the parking brake.
Fully open the fuel filler door.
Check the fuel filler inlet and the area
around it for any items or debris that
may be obstructing its movement.

Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy

6. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler inlet. This
action should dislodge any debris that
may be preventing the fuel filler inlet
from fully closing.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: If this action corrects the problem
the message may not immediately reset. If
the message remains and a warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.

Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
your engine’s break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1.

Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.

To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.

Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.

Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle's fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Keeping records during
summer and winter will show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.

Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.

Conditions
•
•

Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.

•

181

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.

Fuel and Refueling
•
•
•

Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.

182

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Engine Emission Control
Tampering With a Noise Control
System

EMISSION LAW
WARNING

Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.

Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.

U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.

183

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Engine Emission Control
•
•

Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.

WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.

Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance

To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 292).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.

On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.

The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.

184

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Engine Emission Control
1.

Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 178).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.

Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.

If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.

Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.

Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.

When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:

If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

185

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1.

15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.

186

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
Column Shifter (If Equipped)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Do not use tow/haul when the road
surface is slippery. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.

E249567

Note: The button on the gearshift lever can
be pressed to cycle through the available
drive modes. See Drive Control (page 251).

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:

Understanding the Shift Positions
of your Automatic Transmission

1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector to the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Move the transmission selector to park
(P).

Console Shifter

Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your
vehicle locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning. Always
come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of park (P).
On a console shifter, when the ignition is
turned off, your vehicle automatically shifts
into park (P). If the ignition is turned off
when the vehicle is moving, it first shifts
into neutral (N) until it comes to a
complete stop. Your vehicle then shifts
into park (P) automatically.

E252861

187

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
Automatic Return to Park - Console
Shifter

Stay in Neutral Mode - Console Shifter
Note: Stay in neutral mode is a temporary
vehicle state with the ignition off. Once in
this mode, sufficient battery voltage must
be maintained or your vehicle returns to
park.

Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park
(P) when any of the following conditions
occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver's door with your
seatbelt unlatched with the vehicle
stopped.
• You unlatch your seatbelt when the
driver's door is open with the vehicle
stopped.

Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle
to stay in neutral when you exit your
vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
• Move the transmission selector to
neutral (N).
• A message will appear in your
information display screen prompting
you to press the manual (M) button.
• Press the manual (M) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.

If you turn your vehicle off while moving,
your vehicle will first shift into neutral (N)
until it comes to a complete stop and then
shift into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended
period of time (2-15 minutes) before starting
your vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt causes
this feature to turn on, even with the driver's
door closed.

A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.

Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver’s door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver’s door
closed, see your authorized dealer.

To exit Stay in Neutral mode, apply the
brake and select a different gear.
Stay in Neutral Mode (Console Shifter)
- No Start
Use this feature to move your transmission
from the park position in the event of a no
start situation. If your vehicle has a dead
battery, an external power source will be
required.

Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).

Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power and the starter
can spin the engine. If vehicle battery
voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt
power source (for example, jumper cables,
battery charger or jump pack) may be
required for this feature to function.

Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.

188

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
Note: Once in this mode, sufficient battery
voltage must be maintained or your vehicle
will return to park.

Manual (M)
With the transmission selector in manual
(M), you can change gears up or down as
desired. By pushing the manual (M) button,
you have control of selecting the gear you
desire using the + and - buttons on the
transmission selector.

WARNING
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING
Do not use tow/haul when the road
surface is slippery. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.

Do not press the brake pedal. Press the
START/STOP button.
Fully press down on the brake pedal.
Keep the brakes applied through step
6.
Press the accelerator pedal to the floor
and hold through step 6.
Rotate transmission selector to Neutral
(N) and press the manual (M) button.
Press and release the push to start
button, the transmission needs a
minimum of 2 seconds to exit park.
When neutral (N) is displayed, the
brake and accelerator pedals can be
released.

With Column Shifter
To activate tow haul for the
column shifter, press the button
on the gearshift lever to cycle through the
available drive modes until tow haul mode
is selected. See Drive Control (page 251).
The tow haul indicator light illuminates in
the instrument cluster when the system is
active.
E246592

Without Column Shifter
To activate tow haul, you press the drive
modes button or rotate the dial, to cycle
through the available drive modes until
tow haul is selected. See Drive Control
(page 251). The two haul indicator light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when
the system is active.

To exit Stay in Neutral mode, select a
different gear.
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through ten.

189

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
The tow/haul feature:
• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds
to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a slope.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle to help
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.

In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.

The tow haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load.
To deactivate the tow haul feature for
column shifter and return to normal driving
mode, press the button on the gearshift
lever twice. The indicator light deactivates
when the system turns off. Tow haul mode
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
To deactivate the tow haul feature for
vehicles without a column shifter, cycle
through the available drive modes with the
drive modes button or rotary dial until tow
haul is selected and deactivate tow haul
mode. See Drive Control (page 251). The
indicator light deactivates when the
system turns off.

E252861

The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: Progressive Range
Selection (PRS) and M mode.

SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)

Progressive Range Selection (PRS)

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the
ability to change gears up or down without
a clutch as desired.

Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep slope.

190

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
With the transmission selector in drive (D),
push the – button to active PRS. The
available and selected gears are indicated
on the instrument cluster.

Manual (M)
Pushing the manual (M) button on the
selector will allow you to manually select
the gear you desire. Only the current gear
will display. Use the buttons on the
transmission selector to manually select
gears. Push the + button to upshift or the
– button to downshift. Once in Manual
mode, press (M) again to deactivate
manual control.

All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Push the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: push the – button twice to
lock out 10th and 9th gears. Only the
available gears are displayed and the
transmission automatically shifts between
the available gears. Push the + button to
unlock gears and allow the transmission
to shift to higher gears. The transmission
shifts automatically within the gear range
you select.

SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pushing the + button.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:

Recommended Upshifts for Best Fuel Economy When Accelerating

Shift from:
1–2

15 mph (24 km/h)

2–3

20 mph (32 km/h)

3–4

27 mph (43 km/h)

4–5

32 mph (51 km/h)

5–6

37 mph (60 km/h)

6–7

42 mph (68 km/h)

7–8

48 mph (77 km/h)

8–9

52 mph (84 km/h)

9 – 10

60 mph (97 km/h)

191

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock

2. Locate your brake-shift interlock
access slot. The slot is located in your
center console storage bin. The access
slot does not have a label.

WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
transmission from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.

E253438

3. Using a screwdriver, press and hold the
brake shift interlock switch. The shift
buttons on the instrument panel will
flash when your vehicle is in override
mode.
4. With the override switch still held, put
the transmission selector in neutral
(N).
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in neutral for
wrecker towing purposes or can be
shifted to the desired gear and driven
(if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.

If you cannot move the selector out of park
(P) with the ignition in the on position and
the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction
may have occurred. It is possible that a
fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 304).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1.

Apply the parking brake and switch
your ignition off before performing this
procedure.

192

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

193

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
CHECK 4X4

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (If

Displays when a 4X4 system
fault is present.

Equipped)

Note: For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle, see
General Information in the Wheels and Tires
chapter.

Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system typically remains in whichever
4WD mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.

Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H and 4L mode
is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage
drive components.

4WD Switch Selections
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Note: If 4L mode is selected while your
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system does not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L for
proper operation.

4WD Indicator Lights
4X2

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with RSC®, the system
automatically turns off the stability
enhancement feature when you shift the
4WD system into 4L (4X4 LOW). You can
manually turn the system off by pressing
the AdvanceTrac button. See Using
Traction Control (page 207). This turns off
the engine management feature, allowing
the vehicle to maintain full power and
enhanced momentum through the obstacle.
The brake traction enhancement feature is
still turned on.

Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
E181778

4X4 AUTO
Continuously illuminates when
4A is selected.
E181781

4X4 HIGH
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.

Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the transfer
case clutch and disable it during driving
maneuvers when necessary.

E181779

4X4 LOW
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.

Note: 4WD mode availability is based on
Drive Mode selection. See Drive Control
(page 251).

E181780

194

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: 4H may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. In certain
configurations, 4H-like functionality is
contained within specific off-road Drive
Modes even when the indicator lamp shows
4A. See Drive Control (page 251).

Note: The information display may show
messages during 4WD operation. See
Information Messages (page 119).
Your 4X4 control is located in one of the
following locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• On the DRIVE MODE selection switch.

4L (4X4 LOW)
Provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while
your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.

2H (4X2)
Delivers power to the rear wheels only. The
information display momentarily shows
2H when this mode is selected. This mode
is appropriate for normal on-road driving
on dry pavement and provides the best
fuel economy.
Note: 2H may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. See Drive
Control (page 251).

Note: 4L may turn off automatically based
on Drive Mode selection. See Drive Control
(page 251).

4A (4X4 AUTO)
Provides electronic controlled four-wheel
drive with power delivered to the front and
rear wheels, as required, for increased
traction. The Information Display will
display 4A when this mode is selected. The
system continuously monitors road
conditions, driver's input as well as other
vehicle sensors and optimizes the system's
behavior based on drive mode selection.

Shifting Between 4WD System Modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement and
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.

Note: 4A may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. See Drive
Control (page 251).

Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can change between 2H to 4A or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress and the LED light
for the selected mode flashes. Once the
shift is complete the information display
shows the system mode selected and the
LED light for the selected mode turns solid.

4H (4X4 HIGH)
Provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to front and rear wheels. The
information display will display 4H when
this mode is selected. This mode is not
recommended for use on dry pavement.
This mode is only intended for severe
winter or off-road conditions, such as deep
snow, ice or shallow sand.

Shifting To or From 4L (4X4 LOW)
Note: 4L mode is not intended for use on
dry pavement.

195

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly may lead to impairment of the
following:

Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD switch to the desired
mode.

•
•
•
•

The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
present, the shift will not occur and the
information display will display information
guiding the driver through the proper
shifting procedures. If the above conditions
are not satisfied in 30 seconds, the system
reverts back to the previous 4WD mode or
drive mode.

How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

If Shift Delayed Pull Forward is displayed
in the information display, transfer case
gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate
this condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (2 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral (N) to allow
the transfer case to complete the range
shift.

Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.

Operating 4WD Vehicles With
Spare or Mismatched Tires

The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system.
If there is a significant difference between
the size of the spare tire and the remaining
tires, you may have limited four-wheel
drive functionality.

Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
•
•
•

Comfort and noise.
Winter weather driving capability.
Wet driving capability.
Four-wheel drive capability.

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.

Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
mode turned on.
Turn on a 4WD mode unless the
vehicle is stationary.
Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.

196

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.

Basic Operating Principles
•

•

Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles

•

Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
your vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.

Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.

If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not
turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. You may
remove this air dam by removing eight bolts.

It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.

It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.

The transfer case supples power to all four
wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
find information on transfer case
maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate
your vehicle.

Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are

Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.

197

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water

In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.

If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.

If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).

When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal while moving slowly.

Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.

Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.

When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
maximizes the engine and transmission
cooling capability.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.

Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.

Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or
hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.

Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.

When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.

198

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.

Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.

Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.

Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 202).

199

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.

WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(such as ladders or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.

Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.

Parking
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission
disconnect from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even
if it is parked. Do not leave your vehicle
unattended with the transfer case in the
neutral (N) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when
leaving your vehicle.
200

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

Spare Tire

(If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with an
Electronic Limited Slip Differential, a spare
tire of a different size than the tire
provided, should not be used. If a spare tire
is installed, a message may appear,
indicating the system has disabled
automatically or reduced function to
prevent system overheat and damage. It
is recommended to reinstall the repaired
or replaced road tire as soon as possible.
When the road tire is replaced, the system
will resume normal operation on the next
key cycle.

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential
(eLSD) system directs torque, enabling the
vehicle to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional axle cannot.
The system is active at all times and
requires no input from the driver.
Note: If your vehicle is not at optimal
operating conditions or a system fault is
present, a warning may be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Depending on the
warning, your vehicle may need to be
serviced. For more information regarding the
system information messages, See
Information Messages (page 119).

Trailer Towing
The Electronic Limited Slip Differential
enhances vehicle stability during trailer tow
operation. During high demand trailering
events (such as steep grades, high speeds
or with a spare tire), the system may
provide a warning in the instrument cluster
and reduce function or enter a temporarily
disabled state. To resume normal function,
stop the vehicle in a safe location and
allow the unit to adequately cool. Once
the system has reached normal operating
temperatures, system function will be
restored and the Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Restored message will be
displayed.

Locking Function (If Equipped)
The lock button engages ‘locker
mode’.
E163170

With the locker engaged, the system
electronically locks the differential causing
both half shafts to turn at the same rate.
This increases traction during off road
events.
The locker mode may automatically
disengage based on certain conditions
such as vehicle speed. When engaged, a
telltale in the instrument cluster will
illuminate amber and the switch button
will be illuminated. When the speed is
exceeded the telltale will turn gray, the
locker will be disengaged and be in
standby mode until the speed conditions
are met. If the eLSD system is faulted and
the locker cannot engage, a warning
message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster and the switch button
will flash.

201

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Brakes
Emergency Brake Assist

GENERAL INFORMATION

Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.

Anti-lock Brake System

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 338).

This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 104).
E138644

Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.

Brake Over Accelerator

E138644

In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.

202

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Brakes
The brake system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster flashes for about two
seconds and then illuminates to confirm
that you have applied the electric parking
brake. See Information Displays (page
109).

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always fully apply the parking brake
and make sure you shift into park (P).
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

Note: The brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated for about ten seconds
if you switch the ignition off with the parking
brake applied, or apply the parking brake
while the ignition is off.

The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional foot parking brake. The
operating switch is on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.

Note: The parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must manually
apply the electric parking brake by using the
switch.

Applying the Electric Parking
Brake

Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.

WARNING
The brake system warning lamp will
flash when applying the electric
parking brake. If the brake system
warning lamp continues to flash there
could be a problem with your electric
parking brake. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.

Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within ten minutes.

Using the Electric Parking Brake In
An Emergency
WARNING
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal is broken or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions, emergency
braking can cause the vehicle to skid out
of control or off the road.
E169085

Note: Repeated use of the electric parking
brake to slow the vehicle while moving may
cause damage to the brake system.

Pull up on the switch to apply the electric
parking brake.

If there is a problem with the brake pedal
while driving, you can use the electric
parking brake in an emergency to stop the
vehicle.

203

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Brakes
Pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while the vehicle is moving to slow
your vehicle. The rear brake lights turn on,
a warning lamp illuminates and a warning
tone sounds. The vehicle will continue to
come to a stop as long as you pull the
switch. When your vehicle speed is below
3 mph (5 km/h), the electric parking brake
will be applied.

Automatic Release - Drive Away
Release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes for
more than four seconds after you
have released the parking brake, there
could be a problem with your braking
system. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.

Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake

The electric parking brake automatically
releases if:
• You close the driver door.
• You put the transmission in a forward
or reverse gear.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
When you release the electric parking
brake, the brake system warning lamp
turns off.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays lit, the electric parking brake will
not automatically release. You must release
the electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.

E169086

You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Note: Do not drive with the parking brake
applied as this will cause damage to the
brake system. You must manually release
the electric parking brake by pressing down
on the switch while pressing the brake
pedal.

Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature releases the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill.

Manual Release

When parked on a hill with the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
slightly when you put the transmission in
gear.

Driving With a Trailer

You can manually release the electric
parking brake by:
• Switching the ignition on.
• Pressing and holding the brake pedal.
• Pressing down on the electric parking
brake switch.

To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1.

Pull up and hold the electric parking
brake switch.
2. Put the transmission in gear.

When you release the electric parking
brake, the brake system warning lamp
turns off.
204

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes release automatically
when the engine has sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down the
grade. This is an advantage when pulling
away on a slope, for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.

3. Press the accelerator pedal until you
feel that the engine has developed
enough power to move the vehicle,
then release the electric parking brake
switch.

Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.

The system will activate automatically on
any slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109). The
system will remain on or off depending on
how it was last set.

If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.

HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) for automatic transmission or first gear
for manual transmission.

Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.

You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.

Using Hill Start Assist
1.

Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal
pressed and select an uphill gear (for
example, drive (D) or first (1) when
facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing
downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.

Note: If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system will
be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.

205

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Brakes
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display.
See General Information (page 109). The
system remembers the last setting when
you start your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
manual transmission and an information
display, you cannot turn the system on or
off. When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.

206

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Traction Control
Switching the System Off

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

E166706

The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

When you switch the system off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.

WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 60).

System Indicator Lights and
Messages

E138639

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

•

If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.

•

Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.

When a driving condition activates
either of the systems.
If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.

E130458

•
•

207

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:

The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:

When you switch the traction control
system off.
When you select an alternative stability
control mode.

Stability Control
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.

•
•

The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.

If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.

The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.

The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

208

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Stability Control
Traction Control

USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 207).

Stability Control and Traction
Control with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when
you start your engine. You can switch off
the electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system
below 35 mph (56 km/h). When the
transmission is in reverse (R), they are
disabled. You can switch off the traction
control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 207).

B
B
A
B

E72903

Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features

Button functions

Stability
control OFF
light

Roll stability
control

Electronic
stability
control

Traction
control system

Default at startup

Illuminated
during bulb
check

Enabled

Button pressed
momentarily

Illuminated

Enabled

Disabled

209

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features

Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)

Flashes then
illuminated

Disabled

Vehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds

Illuminated

Enabled

Disabled

Button pressed
again after
deactivation

Not illuminated

Enabled

Button not
pressed and the
transfer case is
switched to 4X4

Illuminated

Disabled

solid

Disabled

Low
1

The traction control system may still be enabled but with higher entry thresholds
compared to the full system. The electronic stability control entry thresholds are higher
compared to the full system.
2

When you press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds the indicator lamp blinks
for three seconds.
3

Your vehicle may or may not have this feature available. When you select 4X4 Low the
stability control light illuminates and all stability control with RSC features are disabled.
4

Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled.
Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled.

210

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent
speed, press the brake pedal until you
reach the desired speed.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.

Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.

Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
you must apply the parking brake or place
the vehicle in P (Park), or it may roll away.

Hill Descent Modes
Hill descent control allows you to set and
maintain vehicle speed while descending
steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but you cannot use the system to
set or maintain the descent speed.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system provides a
warning in the message center and a tone
sounds when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.

USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL

•

At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)
and 20 mph (32 km/h): When you
press this button, the light flashes
indicating this feature is active. Your
vehicle maintains the speed you desire
while in this mode.

•

At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h): When you
press this button, the light is solid and
a message appears in the information
display indicating this feature is active.
Your vehicle does not maintain the
speed you desire and you cannot set
your descent speed.

•

At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):
When you press this button, the system
turns this feature off and no light or
message appears in the information
display. You need to switch this feature
back on to use.

Refer to Information Displays for hill
descent control messages. See
Information Messages (page 119).

Press and release the hill
descent button on the
instrument panel. The button
illuminates and a chime sounds when you
switch this feature on.
211

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 60).

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.

We recommend that you take some time
to get to know the system and its
limitations by reading this section.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system automatically turns
on each time you switch the ignition on.

The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflection.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.

When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.

Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.

You can turn the system on or
off by pressing the parking aid
E139213
button. If your vehicle does not
have a parking aid button, the system can
be switched off through the information
display menu or from the pop-up message
that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 109).

The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system.

If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and does not allow you to switch
the system on. See Information
Messages (page 119).

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.

If a sensor is blocked and cannot function,
the system becomes disabled and a
warning message appears in the
information display. The system returns to
a normal state once the blockage is
cleared.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.

REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a

Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.

212

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.

FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).

E187330

Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.

The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.

213

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 109). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button.

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.

The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles within the vehicle's driving path,
located near the sides of your vehicle. The
side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).

The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.

Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.

If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always
present in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.

E187810

Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As your vehicle moves
closer to obstacles within the driving path
of your vehicle, the rate of the audible
warning increases.

214

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

obstacles are detected within 24 in
(60 cm) and are inside the driving path of
your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a
standstill condition, the audible warning
stops after two seconds and visual
indication stops after four seconds.

Equipped)

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual distance
indication only when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and
there is a front or rear parking aid obstacle
detected, and the side obstacle is within
24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the visual
distance indication stops after four
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks do not
appear.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control
system off.

E190459

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.

The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
• The traction control system is
activated.
• When the steering wheel angle
information is not available, the side
sensing system is not available. The
vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft
(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to
recover the steering wheel angle
information.

As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and obstacles
are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are
inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
warnings when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and

215

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Parallel Park Out Assist automatically
steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
enter traffic.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Parallel Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.

The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.

The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow or
fog.

Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during an Active Park Assist
maneuver.

Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper or
fascia free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's accuracy. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.

The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause interference.
Active park assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.

The system detects an available parallel
or perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference. For
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air
brakes or horns.
Note: Following a change in tire size, the
system must recalibrate and operation may
be impaired for a short time.

If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or by pressing the button.

216

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object
close to the sensors on the front or rear
of your vehicle. For example, a bike rack
or trailer.
• You attach an overhanging object to
the roof. For example, a surfboard.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side
sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.

Using Active Park Assist - Parallel
Parking

E146186

Press the Active Park Assist
button once to search for a
parallel parking space.

When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.
Note: If the direction indicators are not
used, the system defaults to the passenger
side of your vehicle.

E130107

Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
Active Park Assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.

Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: Drive your vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m)
and as parallel as possible to the other
vehicles while passing a parking space.

When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.

Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.

217

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Automatically Steering into a Parking
Space

When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the
steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space (hands-free). The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.

Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or you
interrupt the maneuver, the system switches
off and you need to take full control of your
vehicle.

E130108

Using Active Park Assist Perpendicular Parking

When you believe your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone
accompanied by a display message, bring
your vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, the system displays a message
and a tone sounds.

E146186

Press the Active Park Assist
button twice to search for a
perpendicular parking space.

When driving at a speed less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system displays a message
and a corresponding graphic to indicate it
is searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching
either to the left-hand side or right-hand
side of your vehicle.

Note: You are responsible for checking your
parked vehicle and making any necessary
corrections before leaving your vehicle.

Note: If you do not make a selection, the
system defaults to the passenger side.

E186193

218

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as possible
to the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.

E186191

When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
and nothing obstructing its movement,
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle backward and forward in the
space.

Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.

When you believe your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone
accompanied by a display message, bring
your vehicle to a complete stop.

Automatically Steering into a Parking
Space

When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, the system displays a message
and a tone sounds.

Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or you
interrupt the maneuver, the system switches
off and you need to take full control of your
vehicle.

Note: You are responsible for checking your
parked vehicle and making any necessary
corrections before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Park
Out Assist
Press the Active Park Assist
button once while your vehicle
is at rest in a parallel parking
space to use Parallel Park Out Assist.
E146186

The system displays a message instructing
you to select a side. Use the direction
indicator to select which side of your
vehicle you want to exit the parking space.

219

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids

E188012

Deactivating the Active Park
Assist Feature

The system determines the clearance to
the front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while
you control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you to enter traffic.

You can manually deactivate the system
by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds while
searching for a parking space.
• Driving above approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) during an active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system
off.

After the system directs your vehicle past
the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides you
to take control of the steering to complete
the exit out of the parking space.
Note: If the clearance in front of your
vehicle allows easy departure, the Parallel
Park Out Assist feature may not be
available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.

Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.

Note: Do not use this system to assist in
exiting perpendicular parking spaces.
Damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or you
interrupt the maneuver, the system switches
off and you need to take full control of your
vehicle.

If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer.

220

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Troubleshooting the System
Symptom

Possible Cause

You may have the traction control system switched off.

The system does not look for a
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
space.
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The sensors may be covered. For example, snow, ice
or dirt buildup. Covered sensors can affect how the
system functions.

There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.

The system does not offer a
parking space.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on
the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
16 in (0.4 m) away.
Your vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking, or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
a battery disconnect, you must drive your vehicle on a
straight road for a short period of time.
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the
current transmission position. For example, rolling
forward when in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
system from aligning your vehicle properly.

The system does not position
the vehicle correctly.

Improperly parked vehicles or objects are boarding the
space.
Your vehicle is too far past the parking space. The
system performs best when you drive the same
distance past the parking space.
You have incorrectly installed or maintained the tires.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.

221

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Symptom

Possible Cause

A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,
or after leaving a car wash.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.

REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.

E142435

The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door, above the license
plate.

Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.

Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.

Use caution when turning camera
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.

222

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Camera System Settings

The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object. For
example, a trailer.

The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 109).

Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).

B C

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner. The rear view camera has a
washer that activates when you use
the rear window washer. See Rear
Window Wiper and Washers (page
86).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.

F
E142436

223

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Active guidelines (If equipped)

Centerline

Fixed guideline: Green zone

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Red zone

Rear bumper

Parking Aids
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change
the steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.

The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.

Manual Zoom

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.

WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.

Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).

Equipped)

Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).

E190459

224

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
only images from the front cameras are
displayed. Press the camera button to
display the front camera image on the
display screen.

360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The 360 degree camera system still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

When in reverse (R), only images from the
rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
into reverse (R), the rear view camera
image automatically shows on the display
screen.

Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.

Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with
specific features. Press the small
camera icon shown on the top left corner
of the display screen to open the camera
view menu.
E233726

Use caution when turning camera
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.

The following camera views can be
accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive
(D) when you press the camera button:
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
• Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle.

Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.

The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. Press the zoom
(+) button to quickly access Rear
Normal View from this screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle.

Camera Views
The camera button is located on
the instrument panel and allows
E205884
you to toggle through different
camera views.

225

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Parking Aids
Keep Out Zone

The front video camera, located in the
grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image displays once
the camera enable button is pressed. The
area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.
Note: The front camera has a washer that
activates when you use the windshield
washers. See Windshield Washers (page
86).

E225016

The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.

Side Camera

Front Camera
WARNING
The front camera system still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
E250816

The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provides a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids
you while parking your vehicle.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera may be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
E251883

226

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
The indicator appears in the
information display.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
E71340

Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.

USING CRUISE CONTROL (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.

Changing the Set Speed

When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.

•

Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.

•

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.

Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

E191329

The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.

Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.

227

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.

WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.

Do not use adaptive cruise control
with a snow plow blade installed.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.

Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.

The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.

Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.

E248613

The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On

Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Press ON.

Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.

E144529

Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.

228

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.

Cruise Control
2. Keep the brake pedal fully pressed.
3. Press RES+.
4. The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
5. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.

Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a crash
without driver intervention. Always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do
so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.

E183738

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.

Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.

1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.

E183738

5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
1.

Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
229

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.

E248779

If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.

Gap decrease.

Gap increase.

Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
E183738

If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
more than three seconds, press RES+ or
the accelerator pedal to follow the vehicle
ahead.

The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.

Graphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles

Dynamic behavior

Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.

Sport.

Normal.

You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.

Normal.

Comfort.

Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
230

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
Overriding the Set Speed

Press RES+. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.

Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.

When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
E144529
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.

Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the door after you stop the vehicle.
• You hold the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than three
minutes.

The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Changing the Set Speed
•
•

•

Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage

Press RES+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
RES+ or SET-.
Press and hold RES+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.

Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, turn on Tow/Haul Mode.
Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
gaps and allows more distance for braking.

The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.

Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.

231

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Detection Issues
WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.

E71621

Detection issues can occur:
A

When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.

With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.

There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.

In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.

232

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
System Not Available

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.

The system may not turn on if there is:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.

A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.

Blocked Sensor

E257553

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause

Action

The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

233

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Cruise Control
Cause

Action

Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.

Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.

234

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.

DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.

Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).

At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The system may not function if the
sensor is blocked.
Take regular rest breaks if you feel
tired. Do not wait for the system to
warn you.

E249505

The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.

Certain driving styles may result in
the system warning you even if you
are not feeling tired.

If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.

In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
all limit sensor performance.

Using Driver Alert

The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.

Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 109). When
activated, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings,
and other factors.

If damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
The system may not correctly
operate if your vehicle is fitted with
a suspension kit not approved by us.

System Warnings
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).

235

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system will run automatically in
the background and only issue a warning
if required.

WARNINGS
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The sensor may incorrectly track lane
markings as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
missed warning.
The system may not operate
properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.

Resetting the System

If damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.

You can reset the system by either:
•
•

Switching the ignition off and on.
Stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.

Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If

Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.

Equipped)

Note: When Aid or both modes are selected
and the system detects no steering activity
for a short period, the system alerts you to
put your hands on the steering wheel. The
system may detect a light grip or touch on
the steering wheel as hands off driving.

WARNINGS
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
all limit sensor performance.

E249505

236

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Alert Only

The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.

Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a
MyKey™ is detected. If the system detects
a MyKey™, it defaults to on and the mode
is set to alert.

E165515

Alert Only mode provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.

Note: If a MyKey™ is detected, pressing
the button does not affect the on or off
status of the system. You can only change
the mode and intensity settings.

E173233

Aid Only

Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.

System Settings
The system has optional menu settings
available. See General Information
(page 109). The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you turn on the system.

E165516

Aid Only mode provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center.

Adjust the settings to enable one of the
three modes:

237

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics do not display.

Alert + Aid Mode

Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:

E165517

•
A

Alert

Aid

•
•
•
•
•

Alert + aid mode provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.

•

Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
•
•
•

Low
Medium
High

See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).

System Display
When you switch on the system,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle
with lane markings display in the
information display.

Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.

E144813

E173234

Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
Your turn indicator is active.
Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
Quick braking.
Fast acceleration.
The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,
fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).

If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, arrows
display with lane markings.

Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.

238

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs

239

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not use the blind spot information
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.

Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.

The system may not operate
properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice,
heavy rain and spray. Always drive with
due care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.

Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission

E255695

The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).

240

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).

Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.

System Lights and Messages

If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 119). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.

Blind Spot Information System
with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)

E142442

When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.

E225007

Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.

The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward
from the exterior mirrors to the end of your
trailer.

Blocked Sensors

The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You attach a trailer to your vehicle.
• You have set up the trailer to work with
the system through the information
display.
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.

Note: If you switch the Blind Spot
Information System off, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
automatically turns off.

Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.

241

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
•

Note: If you connect a trailer to your vehicle
and do not set up the trailer through the
information display, the system turns off
and a warning message appears. See
Information Messages (page 119).

Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?

If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.

Note: When towing a trailer, the extended
blind spot zone range decreases to a short
fixed or non-variable distance behind the
trailer. The extended blind spot zone range
returns to 59 ft (18 m) when the trailer is
disconnected.

•

Trailer width measurement:

Setting up a Trailer

Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is
8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.

The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
system can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).

•

Trailer length measurement:

The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the
system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
E225008

•

Trailer length

Trailer width

Trailer hitch ball

The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Toggling up or down using the menu
buttons increases or decreases the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a length
that is equal to or within 3 ft (1 m) of the
actual measured length. For example, if
the actual measured length is 25 ft (7.6 m),
toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft
(8.2 m). When you enter the length of the
trailer, the system setup is saved.

You can set-up a trailer to work with the
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 109).
When setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer
information.
•

Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a
length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
remains on for trailers with a length of 3 ft
(1 m) or less.

Select type of trailer screen Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.

The system only supports conventional
trailers. If you select fifth wheel or
gooseneck, the system automatically turns
off.
•

Enter length of trailer:

Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for the
system to function as designed.

Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?

If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.

242

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
System Operation

•

When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
information display. This menu allows you
to set up a new trailer or choose from a
previously set up trailer. A warning
message appears and the system turns off
if you do not choose or add a new trailer.

Box trailers that have a width greater
than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may
cause early alerts when you pass a
vehicle.
Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with
a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at
the front may cause delayed alerts
when a vehicle traveling the same
speed as your vehicle merges lanes.

•

Note: The warning message may not
appear until your vehicle speed reaches
22 mph (35 km/h).

System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 119).

If you select a trailer in the information
display before connecting a trailer to your
vehicle, the system loads the configuration
for the selected trailer. When a trailer is
connected, a warning message appears.

Switching the System On and Off

Note: A second warning message may
appear stating that the Cross Traffic Alert
system has turned off. The Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function normally in this
situation.

You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 109). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.

Note: The system remembers the last
selected trailer set up when you start your
vehicle.

Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.

Trailer Considerations
The system is designed to work with a
trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less, and a total length from the trailer
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer of 33 ft
(10.1 m) or less.
Some trailers may cause a slight change
in system performance:
• Large box trailers may cause false
alerts to occur when driving next to
infrastructures or near parked cars. A
false alert may also occur while making
a 90-degree turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a
total length greater than 20 ft (6 m)
may cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle is passing at high speed.

To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.

243

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)

Using the Cross Traffic Alert
System

WARNINGS
Do not use the cross traffic alert
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before reversing
out of a parking space. The cross traffic
alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.

The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.

The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).

E142440

The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.

244

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids

E142441

Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.

Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.

Blocked Sensors

System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
E142442

Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.

When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror
on the side the approaching vehicle is
coming from. A tone sounds and a
message appears in the information
display.

Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.

245

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.

If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R). See
Information Messages (page 119).

STEERING

System Limitations

Electric Power Steering

The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.

WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

System Errors

If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.

If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See General Information (page
109).

Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 109). When you switch
system off, a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 119).

Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.

Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.

Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.

246

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Steering Tips

WARNINGS
The system does not operate during
hard acceleration or steering. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.

The system may fail or operate with
reduced function during cold and
severe weather conditions. Snow,
ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect
the system. Keep the front camera and
radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.

Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning

In situations where the vehicle
camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.

The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.

PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If

The system cannot help prevent all
crashes. Do not rely on this system
to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.

Equipped)

WARNINGS
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.

Using Pre-Collision Assist
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).

The system does not detect vehicles
that are driving in a different
direction, cyclists or animals. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.

E156130

247

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Distance Indication and Alert

If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system is designed to provide three levels
of functionality:

Distance Indication and Alert is a function
that provides you with a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The Distance Indication and Alert
screen in the information display shows
one of the following graphics.

1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
Alert: When activated, it provides a
flashing visual warning and an audible
warning sound.
Brake Support: Assists the driver in
reducing collision speed by preparing the
brake system for rapid braking. Brake
support does not automatically activate
the brakes, but if you press the brake pedal
even lightly, brake support can add
additional braking up to full force.
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.

E254791

If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays.

Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system
automatically disables when you select 4X4
LOW or when you manually disable
AdvanceTrac™.

Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.

248

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids

Speed

Sensitivity

Graphics

Distance Gap

Time Gap

62 mph
(100 km/h)

Normal

Grey

>82 ft (25 m)

>0.9sec

62 mph
(100 km/h)

Normal

Yellow

56–82 ft
(17–25 m)

between
0.6sec and
0.9sec

62 mph
(100 km/h)

Normal

Red

<56 ft (17 m)

<0.6sec

Blocked Sensors

Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the Alert and Distance Alert
sensitivity to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 109).
You can switch the Distance Indication and
Alert function off using the information
display controls. See General
Information (page 109).
If required, you can switch active braking
off using the information display controls.
See General Information (page 109).
If required, you can turn the entire
Pre-Collision Assist feature off using the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 109).
Note: We recommended that you turn the
system off if you install a snow plow or
similar object in such a way that it may
block the radar sensor. Your vehicle
remembers the selected setting across key
cycles.

E257553

If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. The radar sensor is behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. With an obstructed radar, the
Pre-Collision Assist system does not
function and cannot detect a vehicle
ahead. With the front camera obstructed,

249

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
respond to pedestrians or stationary
vehicles and the system performance on

moving vehicles reduces. The following
table lists possible causes and actions for
when this message displays.

Cause

Action

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstrucor obstructed in some way.
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.

The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporHeavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
with the radar signals.
automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporSwirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
of the road may interfere with the radar
automatically reactivate a short time after
signals.
the weather conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.

The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.

Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.

The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.

Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.

Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. This message
deactivates automatically when operational
conditions are correct. For example, when
the ambient temperature around the sensor
decreases or the sensor automatically
recalibrates successfully.

Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.

250

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
On the column shifter

DRIVE CONTROL
Selectable Drive Modes
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain
response. This provides a single location
to control multiple systems performance
settings.
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
•

•

•
•

E249567

On the center console

Electronically power-assisted steering
system adjusts steering effort and feel
based on the mode you select. See
Steering (page 246).
Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or high
performance driving. See Stability
Control (page 208).
Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your inputs.
Driveline settings optimize with shift
schedules tuned to each drive mode.

E257552

On the DRIVE MODE rotary switch.

Using the System
The system automatically tailors your
vehicle configuration for each mode you
select.
The drive mode switch is in one of three
places, depending on your vehicle
configuration:

E246604

251

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Note: All transmission gear ranges are
available when using Tow Haul.

Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off or when in reverse
(R).

Eco - For efficient and
responsible driving. This mode
E246597
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and increases driving range.

On-Road Modes
Normal - For everyday driving.
This mode is a perfect balance
E225310
of excitement, comfort and
convenience.

Off-Road Modes

Sport - For aggressive on-road
driving. This mode increases
E246593
throttle response, provides a
sportier steering feel, along with quicker
shifting. The transmission also holds gears
longer, helping your vehicle accelerate
faster when shifting gears.

E225312

E246594

Snow/Wet (4X2) or Grass/
Gravel/Snow (4WD) - For firm
surfaces covered with loose or
slippery material such as packed
snow, ice, water, grass or a thin
layer of gravel or sand.
Sand - For soft dry sand or deep
gravel.

Tow Haul - For improved
transmission operation when
E246592
towing a trailer or a heavy load.
This mode moves upshifts to higher engine
speeds to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting. This mode also
provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and assists
you in controlling your vehicle when
descending a grade. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies based
on the amount you press the brake pedal.

E246596

Mud/Rut - For muddy, rutted,
soft or uneven terrain.
E246595

Note: The Selectable Drive Mode System
has diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system for proper operation.
Certain drive modes are not available based
on gear shifter position. If a mode is
unavailable due to a system fault, the mode
defaults to Normal.

252

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Aids
Transfer Case Availability
If Equipped with Rotary Drive Mode Switch
Normal

Sport

Eco

Default

Available

Default

Available
Normal
Tuning

Default
Sport
Tuning

Available
Normal
Tuning

4L
1

Grass/
Gravel/
Snow

Tow/
Haul

Mud/Rut

Sand

Not AvailNot AvailAvailable
able
able
Default
Slippery
Tuning

Not Available

Available

Default
Off Road
Tuning

Not Avail- Not AvailAvailable Available
able
able

Available

If Equipped.

If Equipped with Center Console or Column Shifter Drive Mode Switch
Normal

Sport

Eco

Grass/Gravel/
Snow

Tow/Haul

Default

Available

Default

Not Available

Available

Available
Normal
Tuning

Default
Sport Tuning

Available
Normal
Tuning

Default
Slippery
Tuning

Available

Not Available Not Available

Available

Not Available Not Available

Available

2H
4A

4L
1

If Equipped.

Note: The drive mode reverts to Normal
when you start your vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle remembers the 4WD
mode across ignition cycles.
Note: Each drive mode has an associated
default 4WD mode, however you can still
select different 4WD modes using the 4WD
switch based on your preference.

253

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System
A storage area is located in the floor of the
rear cargo area. There are two types of
storage systems depending on your
vehicle.

E250822

Lift up on the handle and fold back to open
the cover.

Short Wheel Base System

Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.

E250821

Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.

E250824

E250825

To access the second storage
compartment, fold the cover back a
second time.

E250823

To close, lower the cover.
Long Wheel Base System

To close, lower the cover.

The long wheel base system has two
separate storage compartments. To
access these compartments, there is a
bifolding cover.

254

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
Advanced System: Forward
Divider, Cargo Shelf and Rear
Barrier (Bulkhead Position) (If

With the advanced long wheel base
system, there is an additional cover with
an extra storage compartment underneath.
This cover also operates on friction hinges.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover. To
close, lower the cover.

Equipped)

WARNINGS
Do not load any objects on the shelf
that may obstruct your vision or
strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.

Forward Divider

Do not place people or pets on or
under the parcel shelf.
The board moves to the same positions
for both the short wheel base and long
wheel base advanced systems.

E250828

To move the board into the divider position,
lift up on the handle and position the board
vertically at a 90° angle.

Advanced Short Wheel Base System

Note: The board operates on friction hinges,
which allows it to be put in any position
between a 0° and a 90° angle.
Cargo Shelf
E250826

A storage compartment is located in the
floor of the rear cargo area. The cover
operates on friction hinges. Lift up on the
handle to open the cover. To close, lower
the cover.
Advanced Long Wheel Base System

E250829

To move the board into the shelf position,
lift the board and move it to the horizontal
position. Once the board is horizontal,
insert the forward facing nubs into the
hooks on either side.
E250827

255

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
For the short wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up when the seats are folded down.

Note: Before moving the board into the rear
barrier or bulkhead position, you may need
to flip down the hooks.

For the long wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up.

ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING

Note: Before moving the board into the
shelf position, you may need to flip down
the hooks.

When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

Note: Do not put more than 50 lb (22 kg)
on shelf.
Rear Barrier (Bulkhead Position)

For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.

E250830

Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.

To move the board into the rear barrier or
bulkhead position, lift the board and move
it to the vertical position. Once the board
is vertical, insert the rearward facing nubs
into the hooks on either side.

Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.

Maximum Recommended Load Amounts
Description

Maximum Recommended Load

Vehicles with Moonroof

125 lb (56 kg)

Vehicles without Moonroof

200 lb (90 kg)

Note: The maximum recommended load
is based on the load being evenly distributed
on the crossbars.

256

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)

Some Middle East Expedition vehicles are
equipped with higher Gross Vehicles
Weight ratings and unique capabilities. As
a result, for 4WD Expeditions in the Middle
East (excluding Expedition EL), the
maximum load capabilities are reduced to
the following when using the roof for load
carrying:
• 7,450 lb (3,379 kg) - Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW).
• 3,375 lb (1,530 kg) - Front Gross Axle
Weight (GAW).

Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo. The
front crossbar is fixed. There are two
optional positions for the rear crossbar.
Follow the steps to reposition or remove the
rear crossbar.

Thumbwheel Kit (If Equipped)

E203063

Remove the crossbar bolts at both
sides of the rear crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
3. Replace and tighten the bolts at both
sides of the crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
Note: There may be snap caps in the new
side rail position, which must be removed
before installing the crossbar. These caps
can be removed by using the supplied torx
tool or a similar tool.

E203659

A thumbwheel kit is included in your
vehicle for tying light loads to your roof.
The kit is in the glovebox.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
Note: There may be snap caps in the side
rail which must be removed before installing
the thumbwheels. These caps can be
removed by using a torx tool or a similar
tool.

257

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT

Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:

Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.

E198719

Payload

PAYLOAD

E143816

258

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.

WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
259

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.

Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:

E198828

WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.

Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
260

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:

Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity

1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
261

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

262

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Load Placement

TOWING A TRAILER

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
258).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.

WARNINGS
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 304).
Some vehicles may have the
ability to modify trailer towing
features. See Towing (page 263).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.

263

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
the vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.

TRAILER REVERSING AIDS

Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.

Principle of Operation
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when backing up with a trailer attached.
Turn and hold the control knob in the
direction you want the trailer to go and the
system takes over the steering. This allows
you to focus on checking the mirrors and
operating the brake and accelerator.

This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.

Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once.
You must take care to follow the setup
process accurately, to make sure the
sticker is placed correctly.

Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.

Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup
Assist

Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination and the
surrounding environment.

Note: Once you have entered a trailer's
information into the system, it is stored for
easy recall. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
added to the system.

Note: The system does not detect or
prevent the vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.

264

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
Hitch your conventional trailer to your
vehicle. See Essential Towing Checks
(page 276).
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
it to your vehicle. More information on
selecting your towbar is available in the
Towing section. See Towing (page 263).

E247482

Make sure your vehicle and the trailer are
in line with each other. You can do this by
driving straight forward.
E253721

Select the option to add a trailer in the
instrument cluster menu, using the
steering wheel control. See General
Information (page 109).
2. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the desired
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
continue.
3. Select the type of trailer brake system
for the trailer you are adding.
4. Select the brake effort level for the
trailer.
Note: The default option is low. This is
recommended for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking then
select the other options as required.

E247481

Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
Press the button to turn the system on.

265

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Note: Additional stickers may be purchased
through your Ford Dealers parts department.

Some examples of conventional type
trailers are shown below.
Note: You cannot use the system with the
types of trailers marked with the cross.
The system only works with
conventional trailers. It does not work
with other types including gooseneck
and fifth wheel.

E209805

Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker
(supplied in the back cover pocket of your
quick start guide). Make sure the whole
sticker is within the zone between the two
arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
display.
E209766

Step 4: Take Measurements

Follow the information display prompts.

After the sticker is correctly placed on the
trailer you must take some key
measurements.

Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer
Frame

Note: Accurate measurements must be
taken for the system to operate properly.

The supplied sticker must be placed in an
area visible by the rear view camera.

Note: When rounding in inches, round
upward if the measured length is a quarter
inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
(30.8 cm) would be rounded down to
12.00 in (30.48 cm).

Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn on automatically to improve visibility.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.

Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
round downward. If the measurement is
more than 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round upward.
For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm) would be
rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm). 12.0 in
(30.5 cm) would be rounded up to 12.2 in
(31 cm).

Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after they are
placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
removed.

266

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.

Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display

Record the four key distances (A, B, C, D)
as required by the measurement card.
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.

Using the recorded measurements, enter
the required data into the system. Follow
the on screen prompts to enter each of the
measurements taken in step 4. When all
four distances have been entered, a
confirmation display appears. Check the
values are correct before proceeding, or go
back to change any if required.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the sticker is identified by the system and
marked with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle is correctly
located over the sticker image in the
display. The on screen prompt asks you to
confirm this.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker try cleaning the camera lens, and
also make sure the sticker is within the green
zone as indicated in step 3.

E247545

Distance A
The horizontal distance from the bumper
to the center of the ball hitch on the trailer.

Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4 mph (6 km/h)
and 24 mph (39 km/h) following the on
screen prompt.

Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.

Note: Check your measurements to make
sure you measured from the correct points.

Distance C
The distance from the rear view camera to
the center of the sticker.

Note: If you move the steering wheel during
this procedure, the calibration pauses.

Distance D

Note: We recommend that you do not do
this at night.

The horizontal distance from the bumper
to the center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).

A message displays during calibration and
after calibration is complete.

Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system press the button and
select the required trailer from the display.

267

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing

E246992

Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.

E246991

Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the
system in a safe open area first.

E253721

When the sticker is located, the display
prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The
system turns on.

Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.

Note: The system does not function if your
hands are on the steering wheel. Remove
your hands to resume operation.

Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.

Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control
knob instead. The knob acts as the steering
control for the trailer.
E246993

Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.

268

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.

The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.
Note: If you still experience issues with the
system's ability to detect the sticker, see
the information in the next section regarding
sticker lost during system operation.

Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.

Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a bumper to hitch
ball center measurement of 4 in
(10 cm) to 11 in (28 cm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
have a length outside this range as the
system performance degrades and
could cause improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from bumper and the hitch ball center.
A straight line distance that includes
any vertical rise or drop increases the
measurement and makes it inaccurate.
Inaccurate measurements degrade
system performance and could cause
improper system function. See step 4
of the setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.

Note: Your vehicle speed is automatically
limited.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.

Troubleshooting
Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. However there are
some trailers that do not have a proper
surface and location to mount the sticker.
These trailers are not supported. Attempts
to place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
Accurate measurements are critical to
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements entered or change
them you can access them through the
trailer menus in the instrument cluster.
Choose the option to change the sticker
from the change trailer settings menu. It is
not necessary to remove the sticker if you
are just reviewing or changing
measurements.

269

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.

Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from the bumper to the center of the
single axle or the center of all the axles
on the trailer. See step 4 of the setup
for additional measurement
instructions. The TBA system does not
support trailer lengths outside the
range allowed by the information
display.
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements degrade the system’s
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
measurements entered into the system
are accurate.
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
• If you cannot resolve the issue a new
sticker location should be tried. The
sticker location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.

Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instructions in step 3 of the setup have
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message
this sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to operate correctly the sticker
height must be lowered if you receive
the minimum warning or the sticker
height must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on the
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or
covered so only one sticker is visible to
the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.

Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement pauses the calibration.

270

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
For best results:
• Use a long, straight, smooth and level
road when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
24 mph (39 km/h).

•
•
•

System Operation
•

The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
The system is not available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to operate
correctly. If those sub-systems are not
operating correctly the system may not
be available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition
which prevents the system from
operating. Please make sure the
battery is correctly charged if the
system is not available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
• If the message still displays take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.

•

Sticker lost:
• If the system cannot initially find the
sticker, it may be necessary for you to
change the lighting conditions by
moving the vehicle and trailer or
waiting until conditions change.
• Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message while using
the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible and the
pattern is discernable in the rear view
camera image.

•

271

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Clean the sticker and camera to make
sure they are unobstructed.
Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free
cloth and water.
Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
alcohol sprayed directly onto the
sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft
cloth.
Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer configuration
and any equipment mounted to your
trailer it is possible for the sticker to be
blocked from view of the camera as it
rotates on the hitch ball but not be
blocked during setup. Remove the
obstruction if possible. It is necessary
to remove the sticker from its current
location if the obstruction cannot be
cleared and place a new sticker that is
visible to the camera in all positions of
the trailer behind your vehicle.
Placing the sticker on a surface angled
away from the vehicle reduces
performance. Use a drawbar that
positions the trailer level to the ground
when attached to vehicle. This typically
provides a level surface to mount the
sticker. Place the sticker on a bracket
or other object when no level surface
is available.
Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat
surface that is completely visible to the
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an
edge on the trailer frame. This can
degrade performance.
Shadows on the sticker may effect
tracking performance under some
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker
to another location within the allowed
placement area may improve
performance. Use the change sticker
option in your Towing menu if you
move the sticker.

Towing
•

•

You can change your sticker location
by going into the Towing menu,
selecting trailer options, selecting
change trailer settings and then
selecting the change sticker option. The
previous sticker must be removed.
ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BE
PLACED ON THE TRAILER FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION.
The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate measurements
reduce the system’s ability to locate
the sticker. Check the measurements
entered into the system are correct.
Refer to the step 4 of Pro trailer backup
Assist setup for instructions on
measurements.
You can change your measurement by
going into the Towing menu, selecting
trailer options, selecting change trailer
setting and then selecting the change
sticker option. Disregard the prompt to
remove this sticker and continue to the
next step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.

System does not backup straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to back
your trailer when the knob is not turned.
You can compensate for the trailer
drifting to the right or left by slowly
turning the Pro Trailer Backup Assist
knob until the trailer is following your
desired path and then holding the knob
in that position. If you would like to
recalibrate the system for straight
backing, you can do so with the
following procedure.
• Go into the Towing menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer setting
and then select the change sticker
option. Your saved measurements
display. Do not change them but
continue to confirm measurements.
Once you confirm the measurements,
the system prompts you to perform the
calibration procedure.
System consistently shows Stop Now Max
trailer angle reached warning:
• The system uses your measurements
to determine sticker position and
establish system limits. Accurate
sticker placement and trailer
measurements provide the best
system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered
measurements. Make sure that the

272

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing

•

sticker is placed correctly based on
steps 3 and the measurements were
made correctly according to Step 4.
The troubleshooting guide for trailer
measurements can also be reviewed
for help in making measurements.
To change sticker location or change
trailer measurements, go into the
Towing menu, select trailer options,
select change trailer setting and then
select the change sticker option.
If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must be
removed and a new sticker needs to
be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON
THE TRAILER FOR PROPER
SYSTEM FUNCTION.
Disregard the prompt to remove this
sticker and continue to the next step if
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.

•

The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is stopped
additional warnings indicate the sticker
was lost. Refer to sticker lost trouble
shooting tips.
An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle return to manual control
of the steering.

Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. Using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole (on drawbars with more
than one) when connecting the drawbar to
your vehicle affects the trailer
measurements. Take the measurements
again and update if required.

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.

System consistently shows Stop now take
control of steering warning:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
• The steering wheel is touched while
the system is controlling it. Avoid
touching the wheel during system
operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Backup slowly.

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.

273

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded
trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such
as a draw bar, ball, locks or
weight distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
• Aftermarket equipment
weight.
3. This equals the maximum
loaded trailer weight for this
combination.

This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Towing (page
263).

RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 36.5 feet² (3.39
meters²) if your vehicle is equipped
with the standard towing package,
or 60 feet² (5.57 meters²) if your
vehicle is equipped with the
optional heavy duty package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.

274

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Note: The trailer tongue load
figures into the payload for your
vehicle. Reduce the total payload
by the final trailer tongue weight.
Vehicle Type

Towing
Package

Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.

Trailer
Maximum GCWR Maximum
Weight

Short Wheel
Base 4x2

12,000 lb
(5,443 kg)

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

Short Wheel
Base 4x4

12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

12,500 lb
(5,670 kg)

6,300 lb
(2,858 kg)

Long Wheel
Base 4x4

12,400 lb
(5,625 kg)

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

Short Wheel
Base 4x2

15,300 lb
(6,940 kg)

9,200 lb (4,173 kg)

15,500 lb
(7,031 kg)

9,200 lb (4,173 kg)

15,200 lb
(6,895 kg)

9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)

15,500 lb
(7,031 kg)

9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)

Long Wheel
Base 4x2

Short Wheel
Base 4x4
Long Wheel
Base 4x2
Long Wheel
Base 4x4

Standard

Optional
Heavy Duty
with 50%
Load Distributing (FALR)

275

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.

Color

For load specification terms found on the
tire label and Safety Compliance label and
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load, See Load Limit (page 258).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.

Function

Yellow

Left direction indicator and
stop lamp

White

Ground (-)

Blue

Electric brakes

Green

Right direction indicator and
stop lamp

Orange

Battery (+)

Brown

Running lights

Grey

Reverse lights

Hitches
WARNING

Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)

Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the
trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.

E163167

276

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Integrated Hitch Rating

The standard integrated hitch has two
ratings depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of
the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing
system, which includes draw bar, hitch
ball, spring bars and snap-up brackets.
This system distributes the vertical
tongue load of the trailer between the
truck and the trailer.

WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle and
could result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural damage,
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.

Mode

Maximum Trailer Weight

Maximum Tongue Weight

Weight carrying

6,000 lb (2,721 kg)

600 lb (272 kg)

Weight distributing

9,200 lb (4,173 kg)

920 lb (417 kg)

3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat steps 2-6.

Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles
without Automatic Leveling
Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust the spring bars so that
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.

When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.

When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1.

Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.

277

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
8. Drive the vehicle and trailer at
20–25 mph (32–40 km/h) for
approximately 2 mi (3 km) to re-level
the suspension.
9. Park your vehicle and trailer on a level
surface.
10. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
11.
Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is
approximately half the way down
from H2, toward H1.
12. Check that the trailer is level or
slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, remove the trailer,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat steps 5-11.

Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles
with Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust the spring bars so that
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
Note: If you do not move the loaded vehicle
for approximately 12 hours, the leveling
system may bleed down to a lower height.
This can be especially apparent if you leave
a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for
long periods. You must drive your vehicle in
order to re-level the suspension.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1.

2.
3.
4.

6.
7.

Load the interior of the vehicle to a
weight similar to that which you intend
to carry when towing. This includes
things such as passenger weight and
cargo.
Drive the vehicle for approximately 2 mi
(3 km) to re-level the suspension.
Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
Make sure you securely attach and lock
the trailer tongue to the hitch.
Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.

Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

278

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.

E183395

When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.

The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.

The controller user interface consists of
the following:

Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.

A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.

Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Use the integrated trailer brake
controller to properly adjust the
trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

279

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected. After
disconnecting the trailer connector,
press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow
the system to detect and update the
trailer status.

B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. If you use the manual control
when the brake is also applied, the greater
of the two inputs determines the power
sent to the trailer brakes.
•

Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.

Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance when
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1.

Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.

280

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.

wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
such as a chaffed wire, short to voltage
such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery, or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.

Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages

•

Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
•
•

Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.

•

A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.

•

A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer

•

281

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.

Towing
•

•

When Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.

•
•
•

•

Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.

•

•
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, direction indicators and hazard lights
are working.

Before Towing a Trailer
•

Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.

282

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
slopes.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed when towing may reduce
this tendency.
If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant if the axle is not already
filled with it. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

Towing
•

•

Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.

Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a slope. However, if
you must park on a slope:

Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
temporary spare tire is different in size,
tread-type, or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire
label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using these tires.

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot place the transmission in
neutral (N), you may need to override
it. See Automatic Transmission
(page 187).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.

Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 135).

Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions and
reliability.

283

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
3. For vehicles equipped with a column
shifter, place the transmission in
neutral (N). For vehicles equipped with
a floor shifter, place the transmission
in Neutral Hold mode. See Automatic
Transmission (page 187).
4. Once the transmission is in neutral (N)
or Neutral Hold mode, turn the engine
off, but leave the key in the ON
position. For vehicles equipped with a
floor shifter, the information display
shows a Transmission Not in Park
message.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access, you can keep the vehicle
on while turning the engine off by pressing
the START/STOP button two times
without pressing the brake pedal.

Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, for example towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines prevent damage to your
transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle
or transmission damage may occur. You
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels
off the ground, for example when using a
car-hauling trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Without 4x4
LOW
If your vehicle is not equipped with 4x4
Low, you cannot tow your vehicle with any
wheels on the ground or vehicle damage
may occur. You must tow your vehicle with
all four wheels off the ground, for example
when using a car-hauling trailer.

5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Enable Neutral Tow through the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
7. Press and hold the OK button until the
information display confirms Neutral
Tow is enabled.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.

Four-wheel Drive Vehicles With 4x4
LOW
You can only tow a 4X4 LOW equipped
four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels on
the ground by placing the transfer case in
its neutral position and engaging the four
wheel down towing feature. Perform the
steps outlined in the following section after
positioning your vehicle behind the tow
vehicle and properly securing them
together.

Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.

Four-wheel-down Towing

Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.

Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.

8. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and turn the ignition as far as it can go
toward the off position. It does not turn
fully off when the transmission is in
neutral (N). If your vehicle has an
ignition key, you must leave the key in
the ignition while towing. To lock and
unlock your vehicle, use the keyless

Entering Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Select 2H on the 4WD mode selector
switch.

284

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access, you can keep the vehicle
on while turning the engine off by pressing
the START/STOP button two times
without pressing the brake pedal.

entry keypad or an extra set of keys. If
your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
once without pressing the brake pedal.
You do not need to leave your keys in
the vehicle. You can lock and unlock
your vehicle as you normally do.
9. Release the brake pedal.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission out of neutral
(N) and into park (P).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
Neutral Tow Disabled.

WARNINGS
Do not disconnect the battery during
recreational towing. It prevents the
transfer case from shifting properly
and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in park (P).

Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.

Shifting the transfer case to its
neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in park (P). It
may injure the driver and others. Make sure
you press the foot brake and the vehicle is
in a secure, safe position when you shift to
neutral (N).

Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward
displays in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.

Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position may damage vehicle
components.

6. Apply the parking brake, then
disconnect the vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out neutral (N).
8. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.

Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position and verifying the
message displays in the cluster.
Exiting Four-wheel-down Towing
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:

Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull
Forward Message

With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, start the engine.
2. After starting your vehicle, turn the
engine off, but leave the key in the on
position.

If the instrument cluster displays Shift
Delayed Pull Forward, perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
then start the engine.

285

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Towing
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays Neutral Tow Disabled.

286

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Hints
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 319).
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.

Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).

There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back
home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING
If you continue to drive your vehicle
when the engine is overheating, the
engine could stop without warning.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 101).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine continues to operate
with limited power for a short period of
time.

There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.

If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
cooling fan operates continually.
1.

Gradually reduce your speed and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
prevent severe engine damage.

287

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Hints
•
•
•
•
•

•

Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•
•
•
•

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGS
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.

Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.

Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.

Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.

Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.

Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

E176913

288

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Driving Hints

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.

289

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.

•

Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.

Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.

290

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance

HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.

To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.

The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.

Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

•

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance

•

Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.

FUEL SHUTOFF

Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
Press the button again to switch them
off.

WARNING

In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.

If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.

Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.

Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.

291

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the vehicle.
2. Switch on the vehicle.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.

WARNINGS
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.

Preparing Your Vehicle

If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.

Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.

Connecting the Jumper Cables

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.

WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.

Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.

292

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

Jump Starting

Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.

E142664

Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

E213994

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.

293

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.

The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

3
E142665

1.
2.

Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
E143886

294

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.

WARNINGS
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.

We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.

Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.

Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.

It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.

Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.

Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.

TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery
safety practices. Improper use of recovery
hooks may cause hook failure or separation
from the vehicle and could result in serious
injury or death.
295

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

•

Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.

296

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED

Website

www.owner.ford.com

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.

These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.

Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.

In Canada:

A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

Away From Home

Telephone

If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website

www.ford.ca

In the United States:

Twitter

Mailing address

@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126

Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:

Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)

Additional information and resources are
available online:

297

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.

In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:

In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.

Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

298

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.

THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.

You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.

BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

299

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA

For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico , Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:

CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:

300

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance

Customer Relationship Center

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Asia Pacific

N/A

apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
Central America

+1 313 594 4857

expcac@ford.com

971 4 3327 266

menacac@ford.com

Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
Middle East

UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078

Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands

+1-800-841-3673

N/A

prcac@ford.com

Sub-Saharan Africa

+1-313-594-4857

N/A

ssacrc@ford.com

South Korea

+63-2-717-6410

N/A

infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com

If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.

Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.

To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:

ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE

HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

301

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.

302

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Customer Assistance

Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)

Phone

1–800–333–0510

Ford of Canada Contact Information

Website

www.ford.ca

Phone

1–800–565-3673

303

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle’s main electrical
systems from overloads.

WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.

The fuse box is in the passenger
compartment under the dashboard. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
the box.

The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.

If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 325).

If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 325).

304

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses

E251921

Fuse Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12

Fuse Rating

25A

Horn.

Fan 1.

Front wiper motor.

50A
30A
—

Not used.
2

Starter relay.

Power point 1.

Power point 2.

30A
20A
20A
5A
—

Protected Component

Rain sensor.
Not used.

305

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Number

14
15

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Fuse Rating
1

10A

Protected Component

4x4 module.
Heated backlite.
Heated mirror relay coil.
Heated wiper park relay coil.
Transmission isolation relay coil.
Transmission control module.

15A

Voltage quality module right-side power.
Blindspot information system.
Head Up Display.
Image processing module B.
Front view camera.
Rear view camera.
Cruise control module.

15A

10A

10A
—

Powertrain control module (PCM) run/
start feed.
Antilock brake system run/ start feed.
Electronic power assist steering run / start
feed.
Not used.

Front blower.

Passenger seat motors.

Not used.

Alternator A-line.

Trailer brake control module.

Body control module power 1.

Electronic fan 3.

Driver seat motors.

Rear heated seats.

Integrated wheel end solenoid.

40A
40A

20A
10A

30A

50A
50A

40A
15A

10A

306

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Number

30
31
32

Fuse Rating

Protected Component

Trailer tow class II-IV battery charge.

Power folding seat module.

A/C clutch.

25A

50A
10A

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

35
36
37
38
39
41
43
45
46

Vehicle power 4.

Vehicle power 3.

Vehicle power 2.

Vehicle power 1.

20A
10A

25A
25A
—

Not used.
2

Inverter.

Trailer Tow Light Module Class II-IV.

Front/rear washer pump.

Family entertainment system.

50A
20A
20A

7.5A

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

50
51
52
53
54

Not used.
2

Fuel pump.

Power point 3.

30A
20A

50A
25A

Body control module (BCM) voltage quality
module (VQM).

Trailer tow park lamps relay.

Electronic limited slip differential relay.

40A

307

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Number

55
56
58
59
60
61
62
63

Fuse Rating
2

AUX blower.

Power point 4.

40A
20A

Not used (spare).

5A
—
5A

Protected Component

Not used.
Not used (spare).

25A
25A
25A

Not used (spare).

4x4 module.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

70
71

40A
25A

—

74
75
76
77
78
79

4x4 module.
Not used.
Not used.

10A
—

Trailer tow backup lamps.
Not used.

50A

30A

20A
—

Anti-lock brake system / parking brake
module.

Body control module power 2.
Climate controlled (Heated/Vented) seat
module.
Not used (spare).
Not used.

308

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Number

Fuse Rating
1

10A

—

Protected Component

Heated wiper park.
Not used.
Not used.

15A

Transmission control module power.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

86
87
88
89
91
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101

USB smart charger 5.

USB smart charger 3.

5A
5A

Multi-contour seats relay.

Power running boards.

Power liftgate module.

Heated mirrors.

10A

40A
30A
15A
5A

USB smart charger 1.

USB smart charger 2.

Rear wiper motor relay.

Intercooler puller relay fan.

10A

30A

40A

15A

Heated backlite.

Power point 5.

Fan 2.

40A
20A
25A

Transmission oil pump.

102

—

Not used.

103

—

Not used.

309

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Number

Fuse Rating

Protected Component

104

—

Not used.

105

—

Not used.

1 Micro

fuse.
2 M case use.

Relay Number

Protected Component

R02

Electronic fan 2.

R05

Powertrain Control Module.

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

E145984

Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

—

2
3

7.5A
20A

Protected Component

Not used.
1

Driver seat switch.

Driver door unlock.

310

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12

13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20

Fuse Rating

Protected Component

Trailer brake controller.

Speaker amplifier.

Not used (spare).

20A
10A

10A
—

Not used.
2

10A

Wireless AC charger module.
Hands free liftgate module.
Power liftgate module.
Wireless charger.

Keypad.
Combined sensor module.

7.5A

10A

Gear shift module.
Steering column control module.
Extended power module.
Brake switch.
Smart datalink connector power.

Liftglass release.

15A

Telematics control unit - modem.

Cluster.
Electronic control panel.
Smart datalink connector logic.

10A

Rear seat entertainment module.
Head up display.

Ignition switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
Push button start switch.

7.5A

Transmission control switch.
Gearshift module.
Not used.

311

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34
35
36

Fuse Rating

5A
5A

Humidity and in–car temperature sensor.

Electrochromatic mirror.
Second row heated seat module.

10A

20A

Central lock unlock

Left front door zone module.

Right front door zone module.

Moonroof.

Stereo amplifier.

Left rear door zone module.

Right rear door zone module.

30A
30A

15A

10A

20A

—
5A

Moonroof logic.
Inverter.
Power window switch.
Power mirror switch.
DVD player (if equipped).

30A

20A

Protected Component

Adjustable pedals.
SYNC
Drive mode switch module.
4x4 switch.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning control module.
Audio control module.
Not used.
Extended power mode module.

15A

Image processing module A.
Automated park assist module.
Continuous control damping module.

312

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

37
38
1 Micro
2 Micro

Protected Component

Heated steering wheel.

15A

30A Circuit Breaker

Left rear power window.
Right rear power window.

2 fuse.
3 fuse.

CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.

313

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Fuses
Fuse Types

E207206

Callout

Fuse Type

Micro 2

Micro 3

Maxi

Mini

M Case

J Case

J Case Low Profile

314

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Working with the Engine On

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.

If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.

E166491

2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.

Working with the Engine Off
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

315

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is properly closed and fully
latched.

E190266

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW

E258054

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 324).

Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 313).

316

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
C.

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 325).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 317).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 317).

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).

Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 333).

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 319).
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 315).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 316).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 317).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 374).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

E146429

MIN

MAX

ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:

Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.

Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.

Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.

317

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
E142732

From the main menu scroll to:

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).

Message

To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1.
2.

4.
5.
6.

Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 316).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 374). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
Recheck the oil level.
If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.

Action and description

Settings

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Vehicle

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Oil Life

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%

318

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Message

Not Reset

Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.

Reset Cancelled

Adding Coolant

Action and description

If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.

WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal
injury.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.

Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.

It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 489).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

319

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 370).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.

Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.

In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.

If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.

Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.

To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1.
2.

3.
4.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
370).
Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.

Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.

Recycled Coolant

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.

We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

320

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Severe Climates

A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.

If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.

Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:

321

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.

Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.

You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.

Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1.

Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.

The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:

Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)

WARNING

To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.

322

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.

Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK

TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (If Equipped)

If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 489).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.

E170444

1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

323

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.

E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.

A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.

Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

324

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.

WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.

Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
This vehicle may have more than one
battery. Removing the battery cables
from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.

When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.

325

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.

Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.

Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.

To restore the settings, do the following:

Equipped)

If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.

Battery Management System (If

1.
2.
3.
4.

Apply the parking brake.
Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Switch off all accessories.
Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 93).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 379).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.

The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.

326

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.

CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.

Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.

E165804

Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.

Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.

CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES

4
E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.

E205141

2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.

327

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3 mm
circle on the lens) to the ground and
mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.

3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.

3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target

E167358

4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On
the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal
edge toward the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, you will
need to adjust the beam so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters).

Center height of lamp to ground.

25 feet (7.6 meters).

Horizontal reference line.

Vertical Aim Adjustment
1.

Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
328

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.

Headlamp Bulb
1.
E248807

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment

E248888

Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.

2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP
The bumper fascia and grille must be
removed in order to remove the headlamp
assembly, see an authorized dealer if your
headlamp assembly need replacement.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

LED Headlamp Bulb (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.

329

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Front Direction Indicator Bulb

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs
1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.

E248887

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

LED Direction Indicator and Side
Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
E249669

These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.

2. Carefully remove the cover.

Fog Lamp Bulb (If Equipped)

E248886

4. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
5. Remove the lamp assembly.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.

E163826

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

330

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
Contact an authorized dealer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Rear lamp.
Brake lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
Side direction indicator.
Reverse lamp.
Central high-mounted brake lamp.
License plate lamp.

E248889

Reverse lamp bulb.

Rear lamp, brake lamp and
direction indicator bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.

Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

LED Bulbs (If Equipped)
Note: Vehicles with LED headlamps do not
contain serviceable bulbs. See an authorized
dealer if they fail.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

W5W

Front direction indicator.

7444NA

Position lamp.

Daytime running lamps.

LED

Halogen headlamp low beam.

H11

Halogen headlamp high beam.

HB3

LED headlamps.

LED

Halogen front fog lamps.

9140

LED front fog lamps.

LED

W5W

Side direction indicator.

LED

Rear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.

3057

27/6.7

Front side marker lamps.

331

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
Lamp

Central high mounted brake lamp.
Reversing lamps.
License plate lamp.

Specification

Power (Watt)

912

3156

912

LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Glove compartment lamp.

LED

Vanity mirror lamp.

LED

Map lamp.

LED

Interior lamp.

Rear dome lamp.
1 Second

row rail lamp.

332

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

E248800

4. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not
to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover
and ensure that you properly align the
tabs on the edge into the slots.

When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 370).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 489).

E248801

Release the two clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the front of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
3. Install the new air filter element.

333

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION

CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.

Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-B

Motorcraft® Detail Wash ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC-20 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P3-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)

WSS-M99P43-B

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner CXC-100 (Canada)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
•

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.

•

334

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Exterior Plastic Parts

Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.

For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.

•
•

Cleaning the Headlamps

•

Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.

•

Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.

Exterior Chrome Parts
•

•

Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.

Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.

Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.

Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.

WAXING

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.

335

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Vehicle Care
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•
•
•
•

•
•

•

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

•

Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.

CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.

336

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 338).

On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
crash.

Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
•

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:

337

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Vehicle Care
1.
2.

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)

Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.

Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.

For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.

CLEANING THE WHEELS

For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.

Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.

338

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.

General

Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.

•
•

•

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.

Body
•

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:

•

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

•

•
•

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

Engine

VEHICLE STORAGE

•
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.

•

We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.

339

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Miscellaneous

With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

•

Fuel system
•

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.

Tires

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

•

Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.

Cooling system
•
•

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Battery
•
•

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes
•

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Maintain recommended air pressure.

340

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners

GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have the system reprogrammed.
If you intend to change the size of the
wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.

WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 343).

In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).

Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).

E145298

341

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.

Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 194).

Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.

How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles

Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)

Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

Note: Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although
a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low
traction situations, it won't stop any faster
than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 194). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 315). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.

E145299

342

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

•

Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.

E168583

343

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.

Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
344

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.

test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.

345

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.

Information on P Type Tires

Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall

E142543

C D
B

G
H

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.

Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.

346

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.

B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.

Letter
rating

mph ( km/h)

81 (130)

87 (140)

99 (159)

106 (171)

112 (180)

118 (190)

124 (200)

130 (210)

149 (240)

168 (270)

Y
186 (299)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
347

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:

*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
348

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.

LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.

Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

D
E142544

349

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

B
A

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.

D
E

Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 254).
Inflating Your Tires
E142545

Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.

350

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than

You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
351

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.

Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.

352

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
and dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.

it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear

Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems

E142546

Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case

When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).

353

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.

WARNINGS
You should replace your
spare tire when you replace
the road tires or after six years due
to aging even if it has not been
used.

Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th

Age
WARNINGS
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.

354

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.

WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:

Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.

•
•
•
•

Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
Use both eye and ear
protection.

WARNINGS
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other
tire service professional should do
the mounting.

355

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices

WARNINGS
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.

WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.

Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair, except if the vehicle is
equipped with four wheel drive.
Vehicles equipped with four wheel
drive should have all four tires
replaced simultaneously.
Unevenly worn tires, mismatched
makes, models or brands can be
different in size, resulting in
potential damage to the four
wheel drive system.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.

Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.

356

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.

Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
has a tire pressure monitoring
system, then you need to update
the settings for the system
sensors. Always perform the
system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.

Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
357

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)

USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels can cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.

E142548

Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:

358

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
•
•

•

If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other
conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
Only certain snow cables or chains
have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 265/70R17 and
275/65R18.
You should install snow cables or
chains that have been rated as SAE
Class S.
Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines, or fuel lines.
Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or
less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.

359

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.

Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System

Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1.

This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

360

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly

E250820

The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 109). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.

The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:

361

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Tire(s) under-inflated

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Spare tire in use

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Solid warning light

Flashing warning
light

When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.

When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING
Do not use the tire pressure
displayed in the information display
as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.

It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

362

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.

How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 359). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged it may not
function.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.

Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.

Full-size dissimilar spare

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.

363

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.

•
•
•
•

Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
Winter weather driving capability.
Wet weather driving capability.
Four-wheel driving capability.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.

Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.

Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
swivel wrench and lug wrench are in the
following locations:

Item

Location

Spare tire

Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper

Jack and tool kit bag

Under the access panel located in the floor
compartment behind the rear seat
WARNINGS
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as

Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,

364

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.

WARNINGS
Only use the spare wheel carrier to
stow the wheel provided with your
vehicle. Other wheel sizes could
cause the spare wheel carrier to fail if it
does not fit securely or is too heavy.

When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).

Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.

To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when changing a wheel, shift
the transmission into park (P), set
the parking brake and use an appropriate
block or wheel chock to secure the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed. For example, when changing the
front left wheel, place an appropriate block
or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.

Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the jack and tool kit bag, because it will
have to be reinstalled after changing the
tire.
1.

Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.

Open the liftgate, then locate the
access panel on the floor behind the
third row seat. Unlatch and remove the
panel.

Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.

E252435

2. Remove the wing nut by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the jack and tool kit bag from
the bracket.
4. Loosen the straps and remove the tool
kit bag from the jack.

Switch off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.

365

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
Removing the Spare Tire
1.

Remove the swivel wrench from the
tool kit bag.
2. Open the spare tire winch access plug
at the bottom of the compartment for
the jack and tools tray.
3. Insert the swivel wrench through the
access hole in the floor and engage the
winch.
E252489

Front jacking point

E252487

4. To remove the spare tire, turn the
handle counterclockwise until the tire
is lowered to the ground and the cable
is slightly slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.

E252490

Rear jacking point

Jacking the Vehicle
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damaging your vehicle.

E175447

366

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
1.

2.
3.
4.

3. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

With the vehicle on level ground, block
both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the wheel being changed.
Do not jack the vehicle on a hill or
incline.
Obtain the spare tire and jack tools
from their storage locations.
Use the tip of the jack handle to
remove any wheel trim.
Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
Position the jack according to the jack
locator arrows found on the frame and
turn the jack handle and extension tool
assembly clockwise.
Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient
ground clearance when installing the
spare tire, about 1/4 inch (6
millimeters).

6
5

E166719

5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 368).
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire

Installing the Spare Tire

Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through
the center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack
tool from the inner side of the wheel.
Pull on the cable to align the
components at the end of the cable.
3. Using the swivel wrench, insert it
through the access hole behind the
third row seat and engage the winch.

E175447

Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.

367

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires
4. Turn the swivel wrench clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
will become harder to turn and the
spare tire winch will ratchet or slip
when the tire is raised to maximum
tightness. A clicking sound will be heard
from the winch indicating that the tire
is properly stowed.

5. Carefully place all tools back into the
tool kit bag.
6. Reinstall the tool kit bag on the jack
and tighten the straps.
7. Reinstall the jack properly on the
bracket and secure with the wing nut.
8. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
1

Bolt size

lb.ft (Nm)

M14 x 1.5

150 lb.ft (204 Nm)

1 Torque

specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

368

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.

369

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine

3.5L EcoBoost

Cubic inches

214

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Compression ratio

10.5:1

Spark plug gap

0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)

Drivebelt Routing

E250666

MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Component

Part Number

Air filter element.

FA-1883

Oil filter.

FP-79

Battery.

BAGM-94RH7-800

Spark plugs.

SP-534

Transmission filter.

FT-188

370

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Component

Part Number

Windshield wiper blade.

WW-2247

Rear window wiper blade.

WW-1107

We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 489).

371

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.

E142477

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:

372

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

World manufacturer identifier

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

Engine type

Check digit

Model year

Assembly plant

Production sequence number

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

E167469
E167814

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.

Description

Code

Ten-speed automatic transmission 10R80

373

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter).

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant (Base radiator with auxiliary
rear heat).

18.5 qt (17.5 L)

Engine coolant (Heavy Duty trailer towing
with auxiliary rear heat).

18.0 qt (17 L)

Brake fluid.

Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
1

reservoir
Front axle.

1.80 qt (1.7 L)

8.8" Rear axle (Conventional differential).

2.0 qt (1.89 L)

9.75" Rear axle (Conventional differential).

2.5 qt (2.36 L)

9.75" Rear axle (Limited-slip differential).

2.5 qt (2.36 L)

Automatic transmission fluid.

13.1 qt (12.4 L)

Transfer case fluid.

2,3

1.5 qt (1.4 L)

Windshield washer fluid.

Fill as required

Fuel tank.

23.2 gal (87.8 L)

Fuel tank (Expedition EL).

28.3 gal (107.1 L)

374

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant.

37 oz (1.05 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1

6.1 fl oz (180 ml)

Reference the reservoir cap for proper fluid.

The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and it is considered lubricated for
life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless you suspect a leak or submerge the axle
in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
3

Add 4 fl. oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for complete refill
of Ford limited-slip differential.
4

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-A

Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M2C946-A

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

375

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid (U.S. Canada and Mexico)
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Front axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL

WSS-M2C942-A

Rear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL

WSS-M2C942-A

Transfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV

Transfer case fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV

Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSB-M8B16-A2

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSB-M8B16-A2

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A

WSS-M17B21-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA

WSS-M17B21-A

A/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

376

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35

WSS-M2C300-A2

A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

E142732

We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

377

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2.
Please refer to the brake reservoir cap for
the proper brake fluid. Use of any fluid other
than the recommended fluid may cause
degraded brake performance and not meet
the Ford performance standards. Keep brake
fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30

Specification
WSS-M2C953-A1

E240523

378

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.

MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
379

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
•

•

MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.

In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

380

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System

E246807

Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and
off.

Radio: Press to access or switch between different radio modes.

AUX: Press to access or switch between external media sources.

PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.

Apps: Press to access the apps menu.

Settings: Press to access the settings menu. You can access clock settings
through the settings menu.

TUNE and OK: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band.
In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station.
Press OK to make your selection.

Back: Press to go to the previous menu item.

381

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
J

Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD or AUX mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press
and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. In
SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or
previous station in the category you select.

Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause an audio track.

Sound settings: Press to access the sound settings.

Eject: Press to eject a CD.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/
TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY

Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

382

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System

E246805

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and
off.

Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS
mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station.

Display: Press to switch the display on and off.

Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause an audio track

Sound settings: Press to access the sound settings.

MUTE: Press to mute the playing audio.

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

383

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.

384

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

385

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System

Potential Station Issues
Issues

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.

Cause

Action

This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
by the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.

Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio.
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.

The previously stored
No action required. The
multicast preset or direct
station is not available in
tune is not available in your your current location.
current reception area.

Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.

There is no text information Data service issue by the
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.
frequency.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed

HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables
when Scan is pressed.
HD2-HD7 channel search.

No action required. This is
normal behavior.

below.

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from DTS U.S. and foreign patents.
HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos
are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford
Motor Company and DTS are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.

SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

386

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.

E208625

387

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message

Condition

Action

Acquiring…

Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.

Satellite antenna fault

There is an internal module If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present.
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.

SIRIUS system failure

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

Invalid Channel

The channel is no longer
available.

Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel

Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.

No Signal

The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.

The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel
programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.

Questions? Call

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.

1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide
Subscription Updated

All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

388

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

No action required.

Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E205592

The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.

389

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Driving Restrictions

GENERAL INFORMATION

For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 or Emergency Assist and
*
applications via SYNC AppLink.
•
•
•
•
•

Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.
Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).

When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.

These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

Support
SYNC support is available at your regional
Ford website. See SYNC™
Troubleshooting (page 399).

SYNC Owner Account

Privacy Information

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.

When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages

390

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.

court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 394).

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.

This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.

Initiating a Voice Session

System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a

E142599

Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.

Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.

Global voice commands

Help

Gives you available commands you can use
on the current screen.

List of Commands

Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.

Cancel

This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.

391

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Helpful Hints

System Interaction and Feedback

•

The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.

•

•
•

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.

The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
E142599

Voice Command

Action and Description

Voice Settings
Then either of the following:
Interaction Mode Standard

Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)

Interaction Mode Advanced

Provides less audible interaction and guidance.

Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.

392

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

Voice Settings
Then any of the following:
Phone Confirmation Off

When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.

Phone Confirmation On

The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.

Using the Audio System

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Pairing a Phone
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.

393

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
Press the Settings button.
Select Bluetooth from the menu.
Press the OK button.
Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.

SYNC™
7.

When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.

Voice Command

___ List of Commands
Help
Call ___
Dial ___
Text Messages

Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone and
downloading your phonebook.

__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
contact or phone number.

Using Voice Commands

Phone Controls

Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.

Use the phone buttons on your steering
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call.

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.

Voice Command

Pair Phone

Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu

Action and Description

Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll through the menu to view
contacts, text messages, and the
phone dialer.
1.

Follow the instructions on the audio
display.

Phone Voice Commands

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES

Press the voice button. You can
do things like place a phone call
E142599
and access text messages.
When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for example commands.

•
•

911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).

These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.

394

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
911 Assist

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 290).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the Settings button then select:

Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.

Menu
Item

Action and Description

911 Assist Select the desired option, on
or off.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
395

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
In the Event of a Crash

911 Assist Privacy Notice

Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.

When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".

SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.

911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.

396

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
To Access Using the SYNC Menu

Menu
Item

Press the Mobile Apps button to access
the menu on-screen. Then select:
Menu
Item

Find

Mobile
Apps

Action and Description

available applications and
select a particular app.

Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.

Scroll through the list of

To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

Mobile Applications

Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".

List Applications

SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.

Find Applications

Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.

Help

Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.

App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.

397

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
•

•

To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.

Media Sources

Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.

The AUX button allows you to view and
select available media sources.

Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

Press the AUX button to view your
sources. Use the directional arrows and OK
button to select your source. You can also
use the steering wheel audio controls.

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps

Audio Voice Commands

In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Press the voice button. You can
do things like play a specific song
E142599
or album, skip to the next song,
or tune to a radio station. When prompted,
say a command. See the following table
for example commands. Not all
commands may be available on your
vehicle.

Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.

Command

___ List of Commands

Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.

Help
Pause

Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Play
Next Track
Previous Track
AM ___
FM ___
CD Player

398

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Use your regional Ford website at any time
to check your phone's compatibility,
register your account and set preferences
as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during
certain hours).

Command

Sirius Channel ___
USB
Bluetooth Audio
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.

Market

Website(s)

North America

www.SYNCMyRide.com
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

There is excessive background noise during a phone
call.

The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performance.

Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.

During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

399

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.

SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
This may be a limitation on
phonebook in SYNC is
your phone's capability.
empty or missing contacts.

Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.

I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.

400

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue

Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.

I cannot return to the Phone
menu when selecting a
contact.

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

You are on the Select a
Character screen.

Press the Phone button to
return to the Phone menu.

USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

I am having trouble
connecting my device.

This may be a possible
device malfunction.

Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.

SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.

Bluetooth audio does not
stream.

This is a device limitation.

Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.

Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent
website to confirm your
feature.
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.

401

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The device is not connected.

Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.

I cannot change the Sirius
station.

Make sure that all song
details are populated.

The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.

Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.

Sirius Replay is active.

Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
feature off. You can then
change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You may be using the wrong
voice commands.

Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.

You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.

After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.

SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.

Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist.
voice commands.
of the media section.

402

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.

Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".

If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
The system may not be
say "L-O-L-A".
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
voice commands.
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand
Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong
Wilson".
contact when I want to
Using
the
SYNC phone
make a call.
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the
SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the
understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it.
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.

403

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.

The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".

Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them.
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.

If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have downloaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are
latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or

404

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
and choosing 'Force stop.'
over ignition cycles, for
cannot find any apps.
Don't forget to restart the
example.
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.

There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.

405

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone phone is
back in to the phone. After a
connected, my app is
The USB connection to
few seconds, the app should
running, I restarted the app
SYNC may need to be reset.
appear in SYNC's Mobile
but I still cannot find it on
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
SYNC.
Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.

The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
phone listed in SYNC's
available Bluetooth ports,
Mobile Apps Menu.
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.

Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.

SYNC System Reset

The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.

406

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Getting to Know Your System

GENERAL INFORMATION

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.

Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.

E205444

407

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

Status Bar

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.

Home

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.

Clock

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 457).

Outside
Temperature

This displays the current outside temperature.

Feature Bar

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The Status Bar

The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.

Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.

Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).

408

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

E249671

Callout

Item

Description

Driver Temperature

This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.

Heated steering
wheel

When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.

(If equipped)
C

Passenger
Temperature

When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.

Microphone Mute

This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.

Mute

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.

409

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Callout

Item

Description

Download

This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.

Wi-Fi

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.

Wi-Fi in Range

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.

Signal Strength

This icon displays the phone signal strength and the
roaming signal strength.

Text Message

This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.

911 Assist Off

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.

In-Call

This icon displays when a phone call is active.

Bluetooth

This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.

Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item

Functions

Audio

Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.

Climate

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.

Phone

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.

410

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Feature Bar Item

Navigation
(If equipped)
Apps

Functions

Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or
electric this is also where your settings and
power information is located.

Settings

You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.

Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.

When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 421).

If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.

Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)

Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.

Using Voice Recognition

Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).

Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).

411

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

E208626

You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
Option

Information

Entertain- Information for current audio playing.
ment
Select source.
Navigation

View current road and speed limit (if information is available).
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.

Phone

If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:

412

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Option

Information

All calls

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls Missed calls

If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
1 Depending

on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.

SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.

Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).

PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.

Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.

M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).

VOL: Control the volume of audio output.

Using Your Bezel Controls

Mute: Mute the audio output.

Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:

See Steering Wheel (page 81).

413

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
•
•
•
•
•

•

Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 379).
DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 135).

WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

911 Assist

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

414

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

Website

www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 457).

To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.

415

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Safety Information

•

Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.

•

Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).

See the following table for more specific
examples.
Restricted features

Cellular Phone

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.

System Functionality

Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.

416

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Restricted features

Wi-Fi

Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Text Messages

Viewing received text messages.

Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Website

Creating a SYNC Owner Account

www.syncmaroute.ca

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•

Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.

The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.

Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.

Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.

To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.

USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website

Please reference the website for any
further actions.

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

417

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Updating Over Wi-Fi

If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:

To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.

Menu Item

Settings

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:

General

Menu Item

Automatic
System
Updates

Settings
Wi-Fi
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks

You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.

From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.

When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
and automatic updates are enabled, your
system checks for software updates
periodically. If a new version is available, it
downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.

You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 457). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 472).

To switch this feature off:
Menu Item

Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates

418

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.

SYNC™ 3
Support

media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.

The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.

United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

Privacy Information

If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 457). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company do not access the system data
for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company.

When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported

419

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
HOME SCREEN

E205446

Item

Tile

Home screen display

Audio

Shows the active media source.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the compass.

Phone

The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.

Navigation

This map displays your current location or current
route in real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.

420

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item

Tile

Home screen display

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.
1

If equipped.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.

To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.

Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.

E142599

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.

The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.

Voice Command

There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and Description

Main Menu

Brings you to the main menu.

Go back

Returns you to the previous screen.

Cancel

Ends the voice session.

List of Commands

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.

___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
Next Page

You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Help

Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.

421

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands

Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Sirius Channel ___

Description
1

You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".

FM ___
FM ___ HD ___

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device.

USB

Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.

Play Genre ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".

Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___

1 This

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.

422

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Climate Voice Commands

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.

You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command

Description

Climate Set Temperature ___

Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).

Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Pair Phone

Description

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 457).

Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command

Description

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Dial ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.

423

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your

contact list.

Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command

Description

<0-9>

If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.

Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.

Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.

Clear

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.

Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command

Description

Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___

You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.

Reply to Message
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations

Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)

Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.

424

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Voice command

Description

Find an Address

Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.

Find a ___

State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".

Find POI

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.

Find Intersection

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.

Destination Nearest
___

State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.

Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Favorite Destinations Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.
Destination Home

Allows you to route to your home address.

Destination My Work Allows you to route to your work address.

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command

Description

Cancel Route

Cancels the current route.

Detour

Allows you to select an alternate route.

Repeat Instruction

Repeats the last guidance prompt.

Show Route

Displays the active route.

Route Summary

Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.

Where Am I

Provides current location.

Zoom in

Allows you to zoom in on the map.

Zoom out

Allows you to zoom out from the map.

425

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command

Description

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.

List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.

Find Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Voice command

Description

Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command

Show Traffic

Description

Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices

Displays a list of fuel prices.

Show 5 Day Forecast

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.

Help

426

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command

Description

Voice Settings

Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode
Standard

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.

Interaction Mode
Advanced

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.

Phone Confirmation On

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.

Phone Confirmation Off

The system does not confirm before placing a call.

Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.

427

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
ENTERTAINMENT

E205443

Message

Message and description

Sources

Direct Tune

Presets

Sources

You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.

428

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu item

AM
FM
SIRIUS

USB

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.

Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
1 This

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.

feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:

AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station

Menu item

You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.

Action and description

Enter

Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.

Menu item

Cancel

Press to exit
without changing
the station.

A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.

Presets

To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:

Direct Tune

To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.

You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.

There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.

429

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.

Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

E234451

SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu item

Action and description

Browse

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter

The system tunes to the station you select.

Cancel

You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.

You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.

430

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu item

Replay

Action and description

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.

Live

ALERT

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 457).
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.

Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 457).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.

Satellite radio signal
interference

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.

431

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Troubleshooting tips
Message

Acquiring Signal

Cause

Action

Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.

Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure

Invalid Channel

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.

The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.

Satellite acquiring
signal…

The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.

Questions? Call 1888-539-7474

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.

None found. Check
channel guide.

All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.

SIRIUS Subscription
updated

SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

No action required.

HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)

To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 457).

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

432

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

Website

www.hdradio.com

Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

E142616

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message

Presets

Action and description

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.

433

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

434

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.

SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
Issues

Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.

Cause

Action

The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.

1
Text information does Data service issue by the radio
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently
broadcaster.
playing audio.

There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
1
information shown for broadcaster.
currently selected
frequency.
1

You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

CD (If equipped)

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from DTS Inc. and foreign patents.
HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos
are proprietary trademarks of DTS Inc. Ford
Motor Company and DTS Inc. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.

Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.

The following buttons are also available:
Button

Function

Browse

You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).

Shuffle

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.

435

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button

Function

Repeat

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).

Shuffle

Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.

While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:

Button

Function

Browse

If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.

New Search

This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts

436

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Function

Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump

This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.

Explore Device

If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.

Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information

USB Ports

The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
E211463

SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.

The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.

Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.

SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.

Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 454).

437

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.

CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen

Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 142).

E205823

Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

Heated steering wheel:
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about
5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in temperatures as low as -4°F.
The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates
independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.

438

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the
vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may
also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the
wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
C

Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the
windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to
defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 142).

AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.

Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch
the off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically
turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature.

Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX
A/C.

Rear: A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control options.
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control functions off and on.
Touch Rear Climate to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate
settings. Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the
settings. Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen
to adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.

439

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
To adjust fan speed, touch + or – next to the fan icon.
Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate control
functions does not affect their current settings.
J

Manual airflow distribution controls:
Footwell and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides outside air
to reduce window fogging.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents.
Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.

A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When
recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior.
Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging.
It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.

440

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
Then select:

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.

At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.

To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.

441

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.

Websites

www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:

Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.

Websites

owner.ford.com

E205447

Item

Menu Item

Recent Call
List

Action and Description

Displays your recent calls.
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.

442

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All
B

Contacts

Incoming

Outgoing

Missed

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
A-Z Jump

Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.

Phone
Settings

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Settings (page 457).

Text
Messages

Displays all recent text messages.

Phone
Keypad

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call

Do Not
Disturb

Press this button to begin a
call.

Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
Calls are rejected if you do not have voicemail set up on your
phone. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Note: Certain features are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is moving.

Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 421). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.

443

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

To accept the call, select:

To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Menu Item

Contacts

Menu Item

Action and Description

You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.

Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item

Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Recent Call
List

You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
system logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.

To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Menu Item

The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
•

Action and Description

Phone
Keypad

Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.

Call

The system begins the call.

Signal Strength.
Battery.
911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 457).

You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:

Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.

Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.

444

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item
Item

End Call

Privacy
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.

Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.

Text Messaging

Keypad

Press this to access
the phone keypad.

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Mute

You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.

Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Hear It

Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View

View the text on the touchscreen.

Call

To call the sender.

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

To exit the screen.

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.

Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.

When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1.

445

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 389).

SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences

After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:

Disable

Menu Item

Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.

Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:

To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.

Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.

Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.

Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.

NAVIGATION

Android Auto

Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.

Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.

Map Mode

Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.

Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.

2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See
USB Port (page 389).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on
your device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.

446

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.

E207751

Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.

E251780

Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.

E207752

Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.

E251779

Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.

E207753

You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:

E207750

Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.

North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207749

3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
E207748
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
457).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:

447

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button
Button

Start

Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item

Description

Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search

Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.

448

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete
All
Home

Select this option to remove all previous destinations.

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Work

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Favorites

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search

Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.

Save

Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food

449

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All

Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.

Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Save

This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest

Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.

Shortest

Uses the shortest distance possible.

Economical Route

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.

The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.

Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Menu Item

Start

Action and Description

The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.

450

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.

Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu
You can then select:
Screen View

Full Map

A full screen map displays during navigation.

Highway
Exit Info

Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.

Turn List

Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.

Traffic List

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.

451

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation
Settings

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 457).

Where Am I?

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.

View Route

Press this to see a map of the full route.

Detour

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.

Edit Waypoints

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:

Optimize Order

To return to Go
your route
press:
1.

Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:

Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:

452

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Add Waypoint

The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.

You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:

SYNC AppLink

cityseeker (If Equipped)

The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).

First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487

When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search

cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.

When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.

Send To Car

Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.

You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.

453

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.

For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Navigation Map Updates

Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi

Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website

www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.

Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.

HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 454).

Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.

APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.

454

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.

Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.

Menu Item

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Find Mobile Apps

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites

Action and Description

SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.

The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.

Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.

Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.

455

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 457).

Equipped)

App Permissions

WARNING

The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.

When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.

Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.

Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.

Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.

Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.

Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.

456

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby

Action and Description

Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.

Weather

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map

Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.

Area

Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.

Ski Conditions

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.

Sound

SETTINGS

Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:

Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.

Sound Settings

Reset All

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.

Treble

Adjusts the high frequency level.

Midrange

Adjusts the middle frequency level.

Bass

Adjusts the low frequency level.

Balance / Fade

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.

457

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings

Speed
Compensated
Vol.

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.

Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings

Stereo
Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Menu Item

Podcast Speed

Action and Description

For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower

Normal

Faster

Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Cover Art Priority

Gracenote®
Management

Slower

Normal

Faster

Media Player

Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.

Gracenote®

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist and album.

458

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Information

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.

Update Media
Index

Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.

You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Clock Format

Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone
Update

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

Reset Clock to
GPS Time

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.

Bluetooth

The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.

Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:

Menu Item

Bluetooth

Action

On
Off

Phone

You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.

Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.

The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.

459

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website

owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone

Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.

Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
Menu Item

Action and Description

View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth
Device

You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:

460

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Connect
Disconnect

Action and Description

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.

Make Primary

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.

Delete

Removes the selected device from the system.

Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download
Contacts

Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Sort By:

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name

Last Name

Re-download
Contacts

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.

Delete Contacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone

No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.

Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.

461

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Action and Description

Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert
(Silence)

No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.

You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Mute Audio in
Privacy

When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Roaming
Warning

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.

Low Battery
Notification

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:

911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
Menu Item

911 Assist

Action and Description

Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can
switch this feature on and off by sliding the scrollbar as follows.
Setting Emergency Contacts

Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature
on.

Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.

You can set your contacts in the phone
book for emergency quick dialing.

From the settings screen select:

462

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

911 Assistance

Action and Description

Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.

Set Emergency Select this option as it displays on the screen.
Contacts

Menu Item

Select a
Contact

Action and Description

Select this option under .

The screen lists contacts in the phone
book. Select the contact that you want to
set as emergency contact. You can set
Emergency Contact 2 by same process.
You can set two Emergency Contacts in
total.

Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.

Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.

This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:

Menu Item

FM HD Radio

Radio

Action and Description

Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Available)
Radio Text

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

463

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM

active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following
features:

This button is available if SiriusXM is the
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Category for If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that
Seek
category.
Parental
Lockout

Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Edit Alerts

Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an
alert or delete all alerts.

Navigation

You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.

You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.

Map Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.

Breadcrumbs

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.

POI Icons

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon is displayed on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:

Incident Map
Icons

Select POIs

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.

464

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Route Preferences
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Always Use ___
Route

Fastest

Eco

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.

Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically
Find Parking

The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.

Eco Time
Penalty

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
Guidance
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.

Navigation Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Navigation Preferences
Guidance
Prompts

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.

Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only

465

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection

The connected devices send data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.

The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.

Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.

Menu Item

Mobile Apps

Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Action and Description

Enable or disable the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the
settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Off

You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile
Apps

This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed

Up-To-Date

The system has
No update is
detected a new app
required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is
required.

466

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Updating Mobile Apps…
The system is trying to receive
an update.

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:

Request Update

Request Update
All Apps

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.

There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.

Note: Ford and Lincoln are not responsible
or liable for any damages or loss of privacy
relating to usage of an app, or dissemination
of any vehicle data that you approve Ford
and Lincoln to provide to an app.

General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.

Menu Item

Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.

Distance

Select to display units in
kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in
Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Touch Screen Beep

Select to have the system
beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.

467

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Automatic System Updates

When you activate this
option, the system automatically updates when
you have an available
Internet connection
through a Wi-Fi network or
mobile connection.

About SYNC

Information pertaining to
the system and its software.

Software Licenses

Documentation of the
software license for the
system.

Master Reset

Select to restore factory
defaults. This erases all
personal settings and
personal data.
System Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi & Hotspot

You can access the following:

Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi

Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.

Available
Networks

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.

Wi-Fi Available
Notifications

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

468

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)
Menu Item

You can access the following:
Action and Description

Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off

Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

Settings

Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.

Data Usage

Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.

Manage Devices

Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.

Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.

Note: : For your convenience data usage
may be available for monitoring under
Settings but may not reflect actual or
current usage. The vehicle network carrier
is responsible for providing information
about your account. Please contact the
vehicle network carrier for more information.

Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.

Note: : Ford may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.

Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.

Note: If you do not have an active vehicle
hotspot data plan, open your web browser
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.

Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the
vehicle network carrier to provide the
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old
to new embedded modem and to confirm
any updates are successfully delivered.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.

469

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Vehicle

Door Keypad Code

Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.

Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.

You can select the following features to
update their settings.

Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Action and Description

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera
Delay

You can enable or disable this option using the slider.

You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.

Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Display Off

The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen
to switch it back on.

Brightness

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode

You can select:
Auto

The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.

470

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Auto Dim

Action and Description

Day

The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.

Night

The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.

Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.

Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item

Advanced Mode

Enable this option to remove
additional voice prompts
and confirmations.

Phone Confirmation

Enable this option to have
the system confirm a
contacts name with you
before making a call.

Voice Command List

Enable this option to have
the system display a list of
available voice commands
when the voice button is
pressed.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.

Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.

For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333

When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.

To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.

471

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

refer to the tables below.

Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please

To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.

Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

There is background noise
during a phone
call.

The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.

Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.

During a call, I
can hear the
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction.
but they cannot
hear me.

Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

During a call, I
cannot hear the
The system may need to
other person
be restarted.
and they cannot
hear me.

To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to download my phone- Possible cell phone
book.
malfunction.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

The system
says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.

Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.

472

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.

Possible cell phone
malfunction.

Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.

Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.

Possible cell phone
malfunction.

Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

iPhone

•
•
•

•
•

Go to your cell phone's Settings.
Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
Turn Show Notifications on.
Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.

Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.

473

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
This is a cell phone limitacell phone.
tion.

Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.

USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
Possible device malfunc- cable.
tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.

SYNC 3 does
not recognize
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my
temperatures.
vehicle.

474

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

This is a devicedependent feature.

Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.

Bluetooth audio The device is not
does not
connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad
state.

Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated.
information.
The file may be
corrupted.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.

SYNC 3 does
The song may have
not recognize
copyright protection that
music that is on does not allow it to play.
my device.
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.

Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 428).

The device needs to be
re-indexed.

Update media index. See Settings (page
457).

The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.

When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
This is a device limitation.
not hear any
sound.

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.

475

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media
song informaplayer is incompatible.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.

Connect a compatible device or media
player.

Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Failed connection.

Possible cause

Possible solution

Password error.

Verify password.

Weak signal.

Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.

Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.

Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.

Weak signal probably
Disconnecting
after successful due to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or
connection.
high interference.

Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
with the front of the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interference.

Poor signal seen There may be an
by SYNC 3
obstruction between
despite being
SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
near a hotspot.

If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the
hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.

476

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network.
again.
of available
networks.
SYNC 3 is not
SYNC 3 does not
seen when
currently provide a
searching for
hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.

SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
hotspot

Software down- Poor signal strength, too
far from the hotspot,
load takes too
hotspot is supporting
long.
multiple connections,
slow Internet connection
or other problems.

Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.

SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a hotspot and
the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.

It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
no new software. The
the hotspot requires a subscription, you
connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
be a managed one and it
requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and conditions.

477

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.

Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.

My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.

Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.

My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.

AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applications.

478

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.

There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.

Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I You may need to reset
the USB connection to
restarted the
SYNC 3.
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.

Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.

I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.

Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.

Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.

Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.

479

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You may be using the
SYNC 3 does
wrong voice commands.
not understand
what I am
saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.

Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.

You may be using the
Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does
the name exactly as it
not understand appears on your device.
the name of a
song or artist.

SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.

Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".

The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.

Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".

The contact name may
contain special characters.

Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.

480

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.

You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.

The system
generates voice
prompts and
SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt
ation of some
technology.
words may not
be accurate for
my language.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.

SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

481

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

Personal Profiles have not been set up.
An invalid profile name was entered.

I cannot create a profile.

A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.

I cannot link a keyfob.

A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.

My personalized settings do not save.

A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.

My profile will not recall.

The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.

482

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile
does not
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not

I lost a keyfob.

I lost all profiles.

Personal Profiles is turned off.
The vehicle is in motion.
The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.

483

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

SYNC™ 3

General
Issue

The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
language for the instru- current active language.
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
display.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

SYNC 3 System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.

484

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Accessories
Lifestyle

For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories. Ford Accessories
are available for your vehicle through an
authorized Ford dealer.

Peace of Mind
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Ford Motor Company will warranty your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.

Exterior Style
Keyless entry.
Side window deflectors*.
Sill plates.
Splash guards.

Interior Style
•
•
•

Back-up alarm.
Bumper protector.
Car cover*.
Cargo area protector.
Cargo security shade.
Hood deflector.
Park assist sensors.
Remote start.
Roadside assistance kit*.
Vehicle security system.
Wheel locks.

*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.

Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.

•
•
•
•

Ash cup or coin holder.
Cargo organization and management.
Interior light kit.
In-vehicle safe*.
Roof rack and carriers*.
SUV camping tent*.
Tablet holder.
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.

Floor liners.
Rear seat entertainment system*.
Seat covers.

485

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.

486

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)

Rental Car Reimbursement

Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!

1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.

One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.

Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:

Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components

•

There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.

•
•

•

PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.

Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.

Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.

Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.

487

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)

Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.

You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:

Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).

•
•
•

•

Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.

There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.

Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.

Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232

488

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.

We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.

Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.

It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.

Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).

489

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 318).

Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.

If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.

Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.

Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.

Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.

We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.

490

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Check Every Month

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.

Check Every Six Months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.

491

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Multi-Point Inspection

Accessory drive belt(s)

Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance

Horn operation

Engine air filter

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses

Exhaust system

Suspension components for leaks or
damage

Exterior lamps operation
1

Fluid levels ; fill if necessary

Steering and linkage
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
2

pressure

For oil and fluid leaks

Windshield for cracks, chips or pits

Half-shaft dust boots

Washer spray and wiper operation

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.

Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.

The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.

NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.

492

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval

Vehicle Use and Example

Normal
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling

7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)

Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation

5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)

Extreme

3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)

Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2

Change engine oil and filter.

Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.

493

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1

Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.

Other Maintenance Items

Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)

Replace cabin air filter.

Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Replace engine air filter.

At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)

Change engine coolant.

Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).

Change automatic transmission fluid.
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)

Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).

Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2

Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
5,000 mi (8,000 km).

After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.

494

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE

Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message
appearing in the information display
prompting you to change your oil.

If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.

•

Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.

Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease
fittings).
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace spark plugs.

Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace engine air filter.

Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).

Replace cabin air filter.

Replace spark plugs.

495

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin air filter.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1
or six months
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

Off-road Operation

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin air filter.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.

496

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance

Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals

Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel
drive vehicles) fluid changes or level
checks are not required unless a leak is
suspected or the assembly has been
submerged in water. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.

Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).

California Fuel Filter Replacement

If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).

If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.

Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

497

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

498

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

499

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

500

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

501

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

502

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

503

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

504

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

505

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

506

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

507

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.

ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.

Do not fasten antenna cables to
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Car

E239120

508

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
Van

E239122

Truck

E239121

509

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices

Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)

Antenna Positions

1-30

50-54

2, 3

68-88

2, 3

142-176

2, 3

380-512

2, 3

806-870

2, 3

Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.

END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.

•

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)

Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.

•

510

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.

Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

•

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•

You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•

Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR

•

511

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.

Appendices
•

•

SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional

•

512

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.

Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.

513

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
•

SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•

Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.

•

General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.

•

514

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.

Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.

Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

515

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•

The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.

(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up

516

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.

may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•

(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator

•

517

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all

Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.

You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:

(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.

(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;

(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.

(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).

Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.

You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.

518

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
2. Account Information

distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that

You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.

I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,

3. Software License
•

ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or

Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.

iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•

3.1 License Limitations
•

(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)

519

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others

Appendices

•

is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•

5. Limitation of Liability
•

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

520

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit

Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.

conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.

7. Assignment

8.3

•

By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.

You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.

8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.

8. Miscellaneous
8.1

8.5

This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.

If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.

8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or

521

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
8.6

HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".

©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd

The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC

Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.

The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.

522

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.

Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.

Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.

Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.

Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such

Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

523

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606

Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.

If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:

Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

524

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”

B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.

3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:

b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.

The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,

525

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.

II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Territory Notice
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico

4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.

“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”

IV. Middle East Territory

526

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country

Notice

Jordan

“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.

V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.

B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic

527

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.

Austria
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine

France

Germany

“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”

Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”

C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country(ies) Notice

528

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Greece

“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”

Hungary

Italy

“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”

Norway

Portugal

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”

Appendices
Spain

“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”

Sweden

Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.”

Switzerland “Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.

AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR

VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).

529

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.

MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.

(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES

VII. China Territory

THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER

Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
530

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies

view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.

NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.

Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.

No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.

Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
531

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
Governing Law.

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.

Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection

Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.

The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)

Entire Agreement

This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").

These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.

The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers

532

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.

including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,

533

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
Taiwan Territory

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.

Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:

WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
1. Acceptance

534

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:

5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.

Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.

3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.

7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.

535

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E207818

European Union EU

TYPE APPROVALS

E253824

Ghana

RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)

E253823

Jordan

E207816

Argentina
E253822

Malaysia

E253812

E197509

Brazil
E253813

536

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices
Mexico

E253816

Russia

E197811

Moldova

E197844

Serbia

E207821

Morocco
E253820

Singapore
E253817

Oman

E198002

South Africa

E198001

Philippines
E253819

South Korea

537

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Appendices

E203679

Taiwan

E253818

Ukraine

E207817

United Arab Emirates

538

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index

Air Conditioning

360 Degree Camera...................................225

Air Filter

See: Climate Control.........................................135
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............333

Advanced Camera Views................................225
Camera Views.....................................................225
Front Camera......................................................226
Keep Out Zone....................................................226
Side Camera........................................................226

Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................78

Ambient Lighting............................................92
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78
Arming the Alarm.................................................78
Disarming the Alarm...........................................78

Appendices...................................................508
Apps.................................................................454

4WD

..................................................................................454
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................456

See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................194

At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........108
Direction Indicator Chime...............................108
Headlamps On Warning Chime....................108
Key in Ignition Warning Chime......................108
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...............108

A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................135

About This Manual...........................................7
ABS

Audio Control...................................................82

See: Brakes...........................................................202

Media........................................................................82
Seek, Next or Previous........................................82

ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...............................................................202

Audio System................................................379
General Information..........................................379

Accessories....................................................485

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Touchscreen Display.................382
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................380
Autolamps........................................................88

Exterior Style.......................................................485
Interior Style........................................................485
Lifestyle.................................................................485
Peace of Mind.....................................................485

Accessories

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................88

See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12

Automatic Climate Control......................136

ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............228

Automatic Fan Settings...................................138

Active Park Assist.........................................216

Automatic High Beam Control.................89

Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature..............................................................220
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking,
Parallel Park Out Assist...............................216
Troubleshooting the System..........................221

Automatic High Beam Indicator....................90
Switching the System On and Off................90

Automatic Transmission............................187
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................193
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................192
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................193
SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission...................................................190
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission.............................187

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................328
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................329
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................328

Adjusting the Pedals....................................84
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................81
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................82

Airbag Disposal................................................51

539

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Center Console..............................................167
Changing a Bulb...........................................329

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................323
Auto-Start-Stop............................................174

Fog Lamp Bulb...................................................330
Front Direction Indicator Bulb......................330
Headlamp Bulb..................................................329
LED Bulbs...............................................................331
LED Direction Indicator and Side Marker
Bulbs.................................................................330
LED Headlamp Bulb.........................................329
Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp
Bulbs.................................................................330

Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................175
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................174

Autowipers.......................................................85
Autowipers Settings...........................................86

Auxiliary Power Points................................164
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................164
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................164
Locations...............................................................164

Changing a Fuse............................................313

Battery

Changing a Road Wheel...........................363

Fuses........................................................................313
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................363
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.........364
Tire Change Procedure....................................364

See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................325

Blind Spot Information System.............240
..................................................................................240
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow......................................................................241
Switching the System On and Off...............243
System Errors......................................................243
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................240

Changing the 12V Battery.........................325
Battery Management System.......................326

Changing the Engine Air Filter.................333
Changing the Wiper Blades......................327
Checking MyKey System Status...............63
Checking the Wiper Blades......................327
Childminder Mirror........................................98
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................42
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety.......................................................18

Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........315

Booster Seats..................................................29
Types of Booster Seats......................................30

Brake Fluid Check........................................324
Brakes..............................................................202
General Information.........................................202

General Information.............................................18

Breaking-In.....................................................287
Bulb Specification Chart............................331

Child Safety Locks..........................................33
Left-Hand Side......................................................34
Right-Hand Side...................................................34

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................338
Cleaning Products.......................................334

Cabin Air Filter................................................143
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications................374

Materials...............................................................334

Cleaning the Engine....................................336
Cleaning the Exterior..................................334

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................378
Specifications......................................................375

Catalytic Converter......................................184

Cleaning the Headlamps................................335
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................335
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................335
Stripes or Graphics............................................335
Underbody............................................................335
Under Hood..........................................................335

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................185
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................185

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................337
Cleaning the Interior....................................337

Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................334

540

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Cleaning the Wheels..................................338
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................336
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62
Climate............................................................438
Climate Control.............................................135
Climate Controlled Seats..........................158

Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45

Driving Aids....................................................235
Driving Hints...................................................287
Driving Through Water..............................288
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps........................89

Ventilated Seats..................................................159

Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.............................319

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50
Creating a MyKey............................................61

Economical Driving.....................................287
Electric Parking Brake................................203

Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings................................................................61

Applying the Electric Parking Brake............203
Battery With No Charge..................................205
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..........204
Using the Electric Parking Brake In An
Emergency......................................................203

Cross Traffic Alert........................................244
Blocked Sensors.................................................245
Switching the System Off and On..............246
System Errors......................................................246
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................245
System Limitations...........................................246
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System.........244

Electromagnetic Compatibility.............508
Emission Law.................................................183

Cruise Control..................................................83

Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........184
Tampering With a Noise Control
System...............................................................183

Principle of Operation.......................................227

End User License Agreement..................510

Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................227

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................510

Customer Assistance.................................297

Engine Block Heater.....................................172

Engine Coolant Check................................319

Using the Engine Block Heater.......................173
Adding Coolant...................................................319
Coolant Change...................................................321
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................322
Fail-Safe Cooling.................................................321
Recycled Coolant..............................................320
Severe Climates...................................................321

Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9

Daytime Running Lamps............................89
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................89
Type Two - Configurable...................................89

Digital Radio..................................................384

Engine Emission Control............................183
Engine Immobilizer

HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................385

Engine Oil Check............................................317

Direction Indicators........................................91
Doors and Locks.............................................65
Drive Control...................................................251

Engine Oil Dipstick........................................317
Engine Specifications................................370

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
Adding Engine Oil................................................317

Selectable Drive Modes....................................251

Drivebelt Routing...............................................370

Driver Alert......................................................235

Entertainment..............................................428

Using Driver Alert...............................................235

AM/FM Radio......................................................429
Apps........................................................................437
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................436

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45
Children and Airbags..........................................46

541

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Fog Lamps - Front

CD (If equipped)................................................435
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available).........................................................432
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................430
Sources..................................................................428
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................437
USB Ports..............................................................437

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................90

Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................84

Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11

Ford Protect...................................................487
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................488
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................487

Environment......................................................15
EPB

Four-Wheel Drive.........................................194
Front Fog Lamps............................................90
Front Parking Aid...........................................213

See: Electric Parking Brake............................203

Essential Towing Checks...........................276
Before Towing a Trailer....................................282
Hitches...................................................................276
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................283
Safety Chains......................................................278
Trailer Brakes.......................................................279
Trailer Lamps.......................................................282
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector)......................................................276
When Towing a Trailer.....................................282

Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................214

Front Passenger Sensing System............46
Fuel and Refueling........................................176
Fuel Consumption........................................181
Calculating Fuel Economy...............................181
Filling the Fuel Tank............................................181

Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................177
Fuel Filter........................................................325
Fuel Quality.....................................................176
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................176

Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9

Fuel Shutoff....................................................291
Fuse Box Locations....................................304

Export Unique Options..................................13
Exterior Mirrors................................................95

Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................304
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........304

360-Degree Camera..........................................96
Auto-Dimming Feature......................................96
Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................95
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................96
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................95
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................96
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................96
Memory Mirrors....................................................96
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................95
Puddle Lamps ......................................................96
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................96

Fuses................................................................304
Fuse Specification Chart..........................304
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................304
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............310

G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........160

Gauges..............................................................101
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........103
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge..............................103
Fuel Gauge............................................................103
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge.................................................................104
Turbo Boost Gauge............................................104
Type 1 and 2...........................................................101
Type 3......................................................................102

F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36

Gearbox

Floor Mats......................................................288

See: Transmission...............................................187

542

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................52

Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................138

Intelligent Access.................................................52

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather............................................................140
General Hints.......................................................138
Quickly Cooling the Interior............................140
Quickly Heating the Interior............................139
Recommended Settings for Cooling..........140
Recommended Settings for Heating..........139

General Maintenance Information.......489
Multi-Point Inspection......................................491
Owner Checks and Services.........................490
Protecting Your Investment..........................489
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................489
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................489

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................300
Getting the Services You Need...............297

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................202
Home Screen................................................420
Hood Lock

Away From Home..............................................297

See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........315

Global Opening and Closing......................94

Global Closing.......................................................94
Global Opening.....................................................94

Ignition Switch...............................................168
In California (U.S. Only)............................298
Information Display Control.......................83
Information Displays...................................109

H
Hazard Flashers............................................291
Headlamp Adjusting

General Information..........................................109

See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................328

Information Messages.................................119

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................89
Headlamp Removal

Active Park.............................................................119
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................120
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............120
Airbag.......................................................................121
Alarm and Security..............................................121
Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................121
Battery and Charging System........................122
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................122
Collision Warning System................................123
Doors and Locks..................................................123
Driver Alert.............................................................124
Drivetrain................................................................124
Engine......................................................................125
Four-Wheel Drive................................................125
Fuel..........................................................................126
Keys and Intelligent Access............................126
Lane Keeping System........................................127
Maintenance.........................................................127
MyKey......................................................................128
Off Road.................................................................129
Park Aid..................................................................129
Park Brake.............................................................130
Power Steering.....................................................131
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™..............................131

See: Removing a Headlamp..........................329

Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................144

Head Restraints............................................144
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................145
Front Seat Manual Head Restraints............145

Heated Seats..................................................157
Front Seats............................................................157
Rear Seats.............................................................158

Heated Steering Wheel...............................83
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................142
Heated Exterior Mirrors.....................................143
Heated Rear Window........................................142
Windshield Wiper De-icer................................143

Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................135

Hill Descent Control......................................211
Principle of Operation........................................211

Hill Start Assist.............................................205
Switching the System On and Off..............206
Using Hill Start Assist......................................205

543

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index

Remote Start........................................................132
Seats........................................................................132
Starting System ..................................................133
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................133
Trailer.......................................................................133
Transmission........................................................134

Lane Keeping System................................236
Switching the System On and Off...............237
System Display...................................................238
System Settings..................................................237
Troubleshooting.................................................239

Installing Child Restraints............................19
Child Seats...............................................................19
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................26
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................25
Using Tether Straps.............................................26

Liftgate................................................................71
Liftgate Window.............................................99
Opening the Liftgate Window.........................99

Lighting Control..............................................87
Headlamp Flasher...............................................88
Headlamp High Beam........................................87

Lighting...............................................................87
General Information............................................87

Instrument Cluster........................................101
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................88
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Interior Lamps..................................................91

Limited Slip Differential.............................201
Locking Function................................................201
Spare Tire..............................................................201
Trailer Towing.......................................................201

Battery Saver.........................................................92
Front Interior Lamps............................................91
Rear Interior Lamps.............................................92

Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............256

Load Carrying................................................254
Load Limit......................................................258

Interior Mirror....................................................97
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................97

Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................262
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................258

Introduction.........................................................7

J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................292

Locking and Unlocking.................................65

Connecting the Jumper Cables....................292
Jump Starting......................................................293
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................292
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................293

Activating Intelligent Access...........................66
Autolock...................................................................67
Auto Relock.............................................................67
Battery Saver.........................................................68
Illuminated Entry..................................................68
Illuminated Exit.....................................................68
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade............................................................67
Power Door Locks................................................65
Remote Control....................................................65
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter.........................................................67
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.......................................................................67

K
Keyless Entry...................................................68
Displaying the Factory-Set Code...................70
Locking and Unlocking.......................................70
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................68

Keyless Starting............................................168
Ignition Modes.....................................................169

Keys and Remote Controls.........................52

Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................363

544

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index

Maintenance...................................................315

Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................318
Oil Check

General Information..........................................315

Manual Climate Control.............................135
Manual Liftgate................................................71

See: Engine Oil Check........................................317

Opening and Closing the Hood...............315
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................301

Closing the Liftgate..............................................72
Opening the Liftgate............................................71

Manual Seats..................................................147

Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........302

Manual Lumbar ..................................................148
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................148
Recline Adjustment...........................................148

Overhead Console........................................167

Memory Function.........................................150

Parking Aids....................................................212

Easy Entry and Exit Feature.............................151
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob........................................................................151
Saving a PreSet Position...................................151

Principle of Operation.......................................212

Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
SecuriLock™..........................................................76

PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76

Pedals................................................................84
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................43

Message Center
See: Information Displays...............................109

Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............142
See: Windows and Mirrors................................93

How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................43

Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof - Vehicles With: Vista Roof
Opening Panel.............................................98

Phone................................................................441
During a Phone Call..........................................444
Making Calls........................................................443
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................441
Phone Menu........................................................442
Receiving Calls...................................................444
Smartphone Connectivity..............................445
Text Messaging...................................................445

Bounce-Back.........................................................99
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............99

Motorcraft Parts...........................................370
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................64
MyKey™............................................................60
Principle of Operation........................................60

Post-Crash Alert System..........................294
Power Door Locks

Navigation......................................................446

Power Liftgate..................................................72

cityseeker..............................................................453
Destination Mode.............................................448
Map Mode............................................................446
Navigation Map Updates................................454
Navigation Menu.................................................451
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................454
SYNC AppLink....................................................453
Waypoints............................................................452

Disabling the Liftgate Button...........................74
Obstacle Detection..............................................74
Opening and Closing the Liftgate...................73
Opening the Liftgate Window..........................74
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................74
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................74
Using the Hands-Free Liftgate........................75

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................65

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........492

Power Running Boards.................................79
Power Seats...................................................148

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................492
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................493

Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion ...............................................................149

545

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Power Lumbar.....................................................149

Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........86

Power Windows..............................................93

Rear Window Washer.........................................86
Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................86

Accessory Delay....................................................93
Bounce-Back.........................................................93
One-Touch Down.................................................93
One-Touch Up.......................................................93
Window Lock.........................................................93

Recommended Towing Weights............274
Reduced Engine Performance................287
Refueling..........................................................178

Pre-Collision Assist.....................................247

Remote Control...............................................52

Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................249
Blocked Sensors................................................249
Distance Indication and Alert.......................248
Using Pre-Collision Assist...............................247

Car Finder................................................................57
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................52
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Remote Start..........................................................57
Replacing the Battery.........................................54
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................57
Using the Key Blade............................................54

System Warnings...............................................180

Protecting the Environment........................15

Remote Start..................................................143
Automatic Settings............................................143

Rear Axle..........................................................201
Rear Parking Aid............................................212

Removing a Headlamp..............................329
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............338
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12

Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................213

Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........141
Automatic Climate Control.............................142
Manual Climate Control....................................141

Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Rear Seats.......................................................152
Adjusting the Second-Row Center 20%
Seat.....................................................................155
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seat for Easy Entry........................................152
Folding the Second Row 40% Seat ...........152
Folding the Second Row Center 20% Seat
..............................................................................155
Power Easy Entry................................................154
Power Folding Rear Seats...............................155
Reclining the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seat Backrest..................................................154

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................59
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................302
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................302
Roadside Assistance.................................290
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................291
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage..................291
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................291
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................290
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................290

Rear Under Floor Storage.........................254
Advanced System: Forward Divider, Cargo
Shelf and Rear Barrier (Bulkhead
Position)...........................................................255
Cargo Management System.........................254

Rear View Camera.......................................222
Camera Guidelines............................................223
Manual Zoom......................................................224
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................224
Rear Camera Delay...........................................224
Using the Rear View Camera System.........222

Roadside Emergencies.............................290
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................256
Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................257
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts..........................................................256
Thumbwheel Kit.................................................257

Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................222

546

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Running-In

Side Airbags.....................................................48
Side Sensing System...................................214

See: Breaking-In.................................................287

Running Out of Fuel......................................177

Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................215

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................178
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................177

Sitting in the Correct Position..................144
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................358

Spare Wheel

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................363

Special Notices................................................12

Safety Canopy™............................................49
Safety Precautions.......................................176
Satellite Radio..............................................386

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................387
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............387
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................387
Troubleshooting................................................388

Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................495
Exceptions...........................................................496

Speed Control

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........497
Scheduled Maintenance..........................489
Seatbelt Extension........................................42
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39
Seatbelt Reminder........................................40

See: Cruise Control............................................227

Stability Control...........................................208
Principle of Operation.....................................208

Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................168

Belt-Minder™.......................................................40

Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................169

Seatbelts...........................................................35

Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................170
Failure to Start.....................................................170
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................172
Important Ventilating Information...............172
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................171
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary...........................................................171
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................169
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................170

Principle of Operation.........................................35

Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................40
Conditions of operation....................................40

Seats.................................................................144
Security..............................................................76
Settings............................................................457
911 Assist...............................................................462
Ambient Lighting...............................................469
Bluetooth..............................................................459
Clock......................................................................459
Display...................................................................470
General..................................................................467
Media Player........................................................458
Mobile Apps........................................................466
Navigation............................................................464
Phone.....................................................................459
Radio......................................................................463
SiriusXM................................................................464
Sound.....................................................................457
Valet Mode............................................................471
Vehicle...................................................................470
Voice Control........................................................471
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................468

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........168
General Information..........................................168

Steering...........................................................246
Electric Power Steering...................................246

Steering Wheel................................................81
Storage Compartments.............................167
Sunroof
See: Moonroof - Vehicles With: Vista Roof
Opening Panel.................................................98

Sun Visors.........................................................98
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................98

Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

547

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
SYNC™ 3........................................................407

Troubleshooting.................................................269
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist....................267

General Information.........................................407

Trailer Sway Control....................................273
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................323
Transmission Code Designation.............373
Transmission..................................................187
Transporting the Vehicle...........................294
Type Approvals............................................536

SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................472
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................394
911 Assist...............................................................395
SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................396

SYNC™...........................................................390
General Information.........................................390

RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................536

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................399

Technical Specifications

Under Hood Overview................................316
Unique Driving Characteristics.................174
Universal Garage Door Opener...............160

See: Capacities and Specifications............370

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................299
Tire Care..........................................................343

HomeLink Wireless Control System...........160

USB Port.........................................................389
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................228

Glossary of Tire Terminology........................345
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................343
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................346
Temperature A B C............................................344
Traction AA A B C..............................................344
Treadwear............................................................344

Automatic Cancellation...................................231
Blocked Sensor...................................................233
Canceling the Set Speed.................................231
Changing the Set Speed..................................231
Detection Issues.................................................232
Following a Vehicle...........................................229
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop...................................................................230
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage..................................................................231
Overriding the Set Speed.................................231
Park Brake Application.....................................231
Resuming the Set Speed.................................231
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............229
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When
Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................229
Setting the Gap Distance...............................230
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................232
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.......................................................................228
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........234
System Not Available.......................................233

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........359
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System......................................360
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................361

Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................341

Towing a Trailer............................................263
Load Placement.................................................263

Towing Points...............................................295
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels..........................................................283
Emergency Towing............................................283
Four-wheel-down Towing.............................284
Recreational Towing.........................................283

Towing.............................................................263
Traction Control............................................207

Using Cruise Control....................................227

Principle of Operation......................................207

Switching Cruise Control Off.........................227
Switching Cruise Control On..........................227

Trailer Reversing Aids.................................264

Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................194

Principle of Operation......................................264
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™...........................264
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist.........264

4WD Indicator Lights........................................194
4WD Switch Selections...................................194

548

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index

Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles..............................................................197
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................196
Operating 4WD Vehicles With Spare or
Mismatched Tires..........................................196

Vehicle Care...................................................334
General Information.........................................334

Vehicle Certification Label........................373
Vehicle Identification Number................372
Vehicle Storage............................................339

Using Hill Descent Control.........................211
Hill Descent Modes.............................................211

Battery...................................................................340
Body........................................................................339
Brakes....................................................................340
Cooling system..................................................340
Engine....................................................................339
Fuel system.........................................................340
General..................................................................339
Miscellaneous.....................................................340
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................340
Tires........................................................................340

Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................64
Using Power Running Boards....................79
Automatic Power Deploy..................................79
Automatic Power Stow......................................79
Bounce-back.........................................................80
Enabling and Disabling......................................79
Manual Power Deploy........................................79

Using Snow Chains.....................................358
Using Stability Control..............................209

Ventilation

Stability Control and Traction Control with
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)............209

See: Climate Control.........................................135

VIN

Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................398

See: Vehicle Identification Number.............372

Voice Control...................................................83

Audio Voice Commands.................................398
Media Sources....................................................398

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............393
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu.................................................................394
Pairing a Phone..................................................393
Phone Controls..................................................394
Phone Voice Commands................................394

Warning Lamps and Indicators...............104
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator................104
Airbag Warning Lamp.......................................104
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp..................................................................105
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator............................................................105
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator..............................105
Battery....................................................................105
Blind Spot Information System
Indicator............................................................105
Brake System Warning Lamp........................105
Check Fuel Cap...................................................105
Cruise Control Indicator...................................105
Direction Indicator..............................................105
Door Ajar Warning Lamp.................................106
Electric Park Brake.............................................106
Electronic Limited Slip Differential.............106
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp..................................................................106
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp....................106
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................106
Front Fog Lamp Indicator...............................106

Using Traction Control...............................207
Switching the System Off ..............................207
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................207

Using Voice Recognition............................391
Audio Voice Commands.................................422
Climate Voice Commands.............................423
Initiating a Voice Session.................................391
Mobile App Voice Commands......................426
Navigation Voice Commands.......................424
Phone Voice Commands................................423
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................426
System Interaction and Feedback..............392
Voice Settings Commands.............................427

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................300

549

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Index
Headlamp High Beam Indicator...................106
Hill Descent..........................................................106
Hood Ajar..............................................................106
Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp...........................106
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp......................106
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp................106
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp............................107
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........107
Service Engine Soon..........................................107
Stability Control and Traction Control
Indicator............................................................107
Stability Control and Traction Control Off
Warning Lamp.................................................107
Tow Haul Indicator.............................................107

Washer Fluid Check....................................324
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................334
See: Wipers and Washers.................................85

Waxing.............................................................335
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................363

Wheels and Tires..........................................341
General Information..........................................341
Technical Specifications................................368

Windows and Mirrors....................................93
Windshield Washers.....................................86
Front Camera Washer........................................86

Windshield Wipers........................................85
Speed Dependent Wipers................................85

Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................327

Wipers and Washers.....................................85
Wireless Charging........................................165

550

Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201708, First Printing

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Unknown
Create Date                     : 2017:08:08 11:37:05Z
Modify Date                     : 2017:11:14 13:32:55-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Untitled
Creator                         : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.16 build 20090723
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : Unknown
Metadata Date                   : 2017:11:14 13:32:55-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:4127755a-ae15-4784-8ac0-f5e7ac5dd7f8
Instance ID                     : uuid:cabcc4f2-446c-42f9-b121-72a73dfec8c9
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 553

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools